SAFE BERTHING BERTHING AND MOORING
Trelleborg Marine Systems
A–2
Four key brands Trelleborg Marine Systems is part of Trelleborg’s Engineered Systems Business Area and specialises in the safe berthing and mooring of vessels within ports and
FENTEK High-performance and innovativ innovative e fenders used by leading ports worldwide and the most advanced vessels a�oat.
harbours, on offshore structures and in waterways around the world. We bring together the industry’s best known and respected brands for fendering and mooring systems with the unrivalled collective experience and knowledge of its sales and engineering staff. Our customers benefit from great choice and helpful support at every stage
SEAWARD Specialists in closed-cell foam and polyurethane technology for fenders, buoys and security barriers, also advanced construction plastics including Ecoboard.
from initial concept and detailed design right through to supply, commissioning and after-sales service – all provided by our network of regional offices and local agents. TRELLEX FENDER Versatile modular fender systems and accessories, general purpose fenders and solutions for tugs and workboats.
HARBOUR MARINE Global leaders for integrated vessel docking, mooring and monitoring systems including quick release hooks, berthing aids, electronic monitoring systems and software.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100, version 1.1-EN
A–3
CONTENTS 1
High-performance Fenders
2
Modular Fenders
4
Pneumatic and Rolling Fenders
Foam Fenders and Buoys
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100, version 1.1-EN
6
Engineered Plastics
8
Safety Products
10
Bollards
Multi-purpose Fenders
5
7
Tug Fenders
3
9
Accessories
11
Harbour Marine
12
Fender Design
High Performance Fenders
Super Cone SCK Cell Parallel Motion Unit Elements Arch Fenders Corner Arch Section 1
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S01-V1.1-EN
1–2
PIANC TYPE APPROVAL PIANC is a worldwide non-political and nonprofit technical and scientific organization of national governments, corporations and private individuals. PIANC’s objective is to promote both inland and maritime navigation by fostering progress in the planning, design, construction, improvement, maintenance and operation of inland and maritime waterways and ports and of coastal areas for general use in industrialised and industrialising countries. PIANC was founded in 1885 and is the oldest international association concerned with these technical aspects of navigation. It has made – and continues to make – a vital contribution to technical development in this field. PIANC’s members form an active worldwide network of professionals in the field of inland and maritime navigation and ports. Trelleborg Marine Systems is a corporate member of PIANC.
Type Approval certificate
PIANC contact details General Secretariat Bâtiment Graaf de Ferraris, 11th �oor Blvd. du Roi Albert II, 20, PO Box 3 B-1000 Brussels Belgium Tel: +32 2 553 71 61 Fax: +32 2 553 71 55
[email protected] www.pianc.org
Fatigue test certificate
M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–3
PIANC TYPE APPROVAL Trelleborg is committed to providing high quality products. Consistency and performance are routinely checked in accordance with the latest procedures and test protocols. PIANC has introduced new methods and procedures for testing the performance of solid rubber fenders, allowing for real world operating conditions, in their document ‘Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems: 2002: Appendix A’. Trelleborg has achieved PIANC Type Approval for the following fender types:
Super Cone SCK Cell Unit Element AN Arch ANP Arch Verification testing of SCK 3000
PIANC Type Approval brings the following benefits:
proven product quality tests simulate real operating conditions longer service life lower maintenance greater reliability reduced lifetime costs manufacturer commitment excludes unsafe ‘copy’ and ‘fake’ fenders simplifies contract specifications
M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Testing is carried out in two stages: to prove behaviour of the generic fender type, and then to confirm that performance of fenders made for each project meet the required performances.
Type Approval testing (Stage 1) PIANC Type Approval testing is carried out to determine the effects of environmental factors on the performance of various fender types. Trelleborg’s Type Approval tests are witnessed by Germanischer Lloyd.
Verification testing (Stage 2) CV method verification testing is routinely carried out on all significant orders to confirm the Rated Performance Data (RPD) of Trelleborg’s PIANC Type Approved fenders. Results are normalised to 0.15m/s compression speed, 23°C temperature and 0° compression angle.
Fatigue testing of SCN fender
Speed testing of AN fender
1–4
SUPER CONE FENDERS Super Cones are the latest generation of ‘cell’ fender, with optimal performance and efficiency. The conical body shape makes the SCN very stable even at large compression angles, and provides excellent shear strength. With overload stops the Super Cone is even more resistant to overcompression.
Features Highly efficient geometry No performance loss even at large berthing angles Stable shape resists shear Wide choice of rubber compounds
Applications General cargo berths Bulk terminals Oil and LNG facilities Container berths RoRo and cruise terminals Parallel motion systems Monopiles and dolphins
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–5
SUPER CONE FENDERS H
ØW
V
ØU
C
D
SCN 300
300
500
–
295
27–37
SCN 350
350
570
–
330
SCN 400
400
650
–
SCN 500
500
800
SCN 550
550
SCN 600
Anchors/ Head bolts
ØB
ØS
Zmin
Weight
20–25
440
255
4 × M20
45
40
27–37
20–25
510
275
4 × M20
52
50
390
30–40
20–28
585
340
4 × M24
60
76
–
490
32–42
30–38
730
425
4 × M24
75
160
880
–
540
32–42
30–38
790
470
4 × M24
82
210
600
960
–
590
40–52
35–42
875
515
4 × M30
90
270
SCN 700
700
1120
–
685
40–52
35–42
1020
600
4 × M30
105
411
SCN 800
800
1280
–
785
40–52
35–42
1165
685
6 × M30
120
606
SCN 900
900
1440
–
885
40–52
35–42
1313
770
6 × M30
135
841
SCN 950
950
1520
1440
930
40–52
40–50
1390
815
6 × M30
142
980
SCN 1000
1000
1600
–
980
50–65
40–50
1460
855
6 × M36
150
1125
SCN 1050
1050
1680
–
1030
50–65
45–55
1530
900
6 × M36
157
1360
SCN 1100
1100
1760
–
1080
50–65
50–58
1605
940
8 × M36
165
1567
SCN 1200
1200
1920
–
1175
57–80
50–58
1750
1025
8 × M42
180
2028
SCN 1300
1300
2080
–
1275
65–90
50–58
1900
1100
8 × M48
195
2455
SCN 1400
1400
2240
2180
1370
65–90
60–70
2040
1195
8 × M48
210
3105
SCN 1600
1600
2560
2390
1570
65–90
70–80
2335
1365
8 × M48
240
4645
SCN 1800
1800
2880
2700
1765
75–100
70–80
2625
1540
10 × M56
270
6618
SCN 2000
2000
3200
–
1955
80–105
90–105
2920
1710
10 × M56
300
9560
[ Units: mm, kg ]
ØB
Z
H D
ØS
C
ØW
ØU Overload stop
V Some SCN sizes have a modified �ange for reduced shipping dimensions.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–6
SUPER CONE FENDERS Rated Performance Data (RPD)* E0.9
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E1.3
E1.4
E1.5
E1.6
E1.7
E1.8
E1.9
E2.0
SCN 300
ER RR
7.7 59
8.6 65
8.9 67
9.2 68
9.5 70
9.8 72
10.1 74
10.4 75
10.6 77
10.9 79
11.2 80
11.5 82
SCN 350
ER RR
12.5 80
13.9 89
14.4 91
14.8 93
15.3 96
15.7 98
16.2 100
16.7 102
17.1 104
17.6 107
18 109
18 5 111
SCN 400
ER RR
18.6 104
20.7 116
21.4 119
22.1 122
22.8 125
23.5 128
24.2 131
24.8 133
25.5 136
26.2 139
26.9 142
27.6 145
SCN 500
ER RR
36.5 164
40.5 182
41.9 187
43.2 191
44.6 196
45.9 200
47.3 205
48.6 209
50 214
51.3 218
52.7 223
54 227
SCN 550
ER RR
49 198
54 220
56 226
58 231
59 237
61 242
63 248
65 253
67 259
68 264
70 270
72 275
SCN 600
ER RR
63 225
70 250
72 257
74 263
76 270
78 276
80 283
82 289
84 296
86 302
88 309
90 315
SCN 700
ER RR
117 320
130 355
134 365
137 374
141 384
144 393
148 403
151 412
155 422
158 431
162 441
165 450
SCN 800
ER RR
171 419
190 465
196 478
201 490
207 503
212 515
218 528
223 540
229 553
234 565
240 578
245 590
SCN 900
ER RR
248 527
275 585
282 601
289 617
296 633
303 649
310 665
317 681
324 697
331 713
338 729
345 745
SCN 950
ER RR
305 559
338 622
347 638
356 655
366 672
375 688
384 705
393 722
402 739
411 755
420 772
429 789
SCN 1000
ER RR
338 653
375 725
385 745
395 764
405 784
415 803
425 823
435 842
445 862
455 881
465 901
475 920
SCN 1050
ER RR
392 720
435 800
447 822
458 843
470 865
481 886
493 908
504 929
516 951
527 972
539 994
550 1015
SCN 1100
ER RR
450 788
500 875
514 899
527 923
541 947
554 971
568 995
581 1019
595 1043
608 1067
622 1091
635 1115
SCN 1200
ER RR
585 941
650 1045
668 1073
685 1101
703 1129
720 1157
738 1185
755 1213
773 1241
790 1269
808 1297
825 1325
SCN 1300
ER RR
743 1103
825 1225
847 1258
869 1291
891 1324
913 1357
935 1390
957 1423
979 1456
1001 1489
1023 1522
1045 1555
SCN 1400
ER RR
927 1278
1030 1420
1058 1459
1085 1497
1113 1536
1140 1574
1168 1613
1195 1651
1223 1690
1250 1728
1278 1767
1305 1805
SCN 1600
ER RR
1382 1670
1535 1855
1577 1905
1618 1955
1660 2005
1701 2055
1743 2105
1784 2155
1826 2205
1867 2255
1909 2305
1950 2355
SCN 1800
ER RR
1967 2115
2185 2350
2244 2413
2303 2476
2362 2539
2421 2602
2480 2665
2539 2728
2598 2791
2657 2854
2716 2917
2775 2980
SCN 2000
ER RR
2700 2610
3000 2900
3080 2978
3160 3056
3240 3134
3320 3212
3400 3290
3480 3368
3560 3446
3640 3524
3720 3602
3800 3680
*in accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: k Nm, kN ]
120
100
80 ) % ( n60 o i t c a e R
120 100 80 )
40
% (
60 y g
r e E
40 n
20
20 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
De�ection (%)
45
50
55
60
65
70
0 75
72
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–7
SUPER CONE FENDERS Rated Performance Data (RPD)* E2.1
E2.2
E2.3
E2.4
E2.5
E2.6
SCN 300
ER RR
11.8 84
12.1 86
12.4 89
12.7 91
13.0 93
13.3 95
13.5 97
13.8 100
14.1 102
14.4 104
15.9 114
0.138
SCN 350
ER RR
19 114
19.4 117
19.9 120
20.3 123
20.8 126
21.3 129
21.7 132
22.2 135
22.6 138
23.1 141
25.4 155
0.163
SCN 400
ER RR
28.3 149
29 153
29.7 157
30.4 161
31 1 165
31.8 169
32.5 173
33.2 177
33.9 181
34.6 185
38.1 204
0.186
SCN 500
ER RR
55.4 233
56.7 239
58.1 246
59.4 252
60.8 258
62.2 264
63.5 270
64.9 277
66.2 283
67.6 289
74.4 318
0.232
SCN 550
ER RR
74 283
76 290
77 298
79 305
81 313
83 320
85 328
86 335
88 343
90 350
99 385
0.256
SCN 600
ER RR
93 324
96 332
99 341
102 349
105 358
108 366
111 375
114 383
117 392
120 400
132 440
0.290
SCN 700
ER RR
169 462
173 474
177 486
181 498
185 510
189 522
193 534
197 546
201 558
205 570
226 627
0.364
SCN 800
ER RR
252 606
258 621
265 637
271 652
278 668
284 683
291 699
297 714
304 730
310 745
341 820
0.414
SCN 900
ER RR
355 765
364 785
374 805
383 825
393 845
402 865
412 885
421 905
431 925
440 945
484 1040
0.466
SCN 950
ER RR
440 810
452 831
463 852
475 873
486 894
497 915
509 936
520 957
532 978
543 999
598 1099
0.544
SCN 1000
ER RR
488 945
501 969
514 994
527 1018
540 1043
553 1067
566 1092
579 1116
592 1141
605 1165
666 1282
0.518
SCN 1050
ER RR
565 1042
580 1069
595 1096
610 1123
625 1150
640 1177
655 1204
670 1231
685 1258
700 1285
770 1414
0.544
SCN 1100
ER RR
652 1145
669 1174
686 1204
703 1233
720 1263
737 1292
754 1322
771 1351
788 1381
805 1410
886 1551
0.571
SCN 1200
ER RR
847 1361
869 1396
891 1432
913 1467
935 1503
957 1538
979 1574
1001 1609
1023 1645
1045 1680
1150 1848
0.622
SCN 1300
ER RR
1074 1597
1102 1638
1131 1680
1159 1721
1188 1763
1216 1804
1245 1846
1273 1887
1302 1929
1330 1970
1463 2167
0.674
SCN 1400
ER RR
1341 1853
1376 1901
1412 1949
1447 1997
1483 2045
1518 2093
1554 2141
1589 2189
1625 2237
1660 2285
1826 2514
0.725
SCN 1600
ER RR
2003 2418
2056 2480
2109 2543
2162 2605
2215 2668
2268 2730
2321 2793
2374 2855
2427 2918
2480 2980
2728 3278
0.830
ER RR E SCN 2000 R RR
2851 3060 3904 3778
2926 3139 4008 3876
3002 3219 4112 3974
3077 3298 4216 4072
3153 3378 4320 4170
3228 3457 4424 4268
3304 3537 4528 4366
3379 3616 4632 4464
3455 3696 4736 4562
3530 3775 4840 4660
3883 4153 5324 5126
SCN 1800
E2.7
E2.8
E2.9
E3.0
E3.1
*in accordance with PIANC.
E/R ( å)
0.932 1.039
[ Units: k Nm, kN ]
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35 40
45
50
55
60
65
70
Ei (%)
0
1
4
8
15
22
31
40 50
59
67
75
82
89
96
100 106
Ri ( %)
0
19
39
59
75
89
97 100 98
92
84
77
73
77
91
100 118
72
75
Ri Ei
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Di
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing) Angle factor
Temperature factor
Velocity factor For steady state deceleration, the
Angle (°)
AF
Temperature (°C)
TF
Time (seconds)
VF
0
1.000
50
0.882
1
1.050
40
0.926
2
1.020
30
0.969
3
1.012
23
1.000
4
1.005
d = fender de�ection (mm)
5
1.000
Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
6
1.000
3
1.039
5
1.055
8
1.029
10
1.056
10
1.000
0
1.099
15
0.856
20
0.739
-10
1.143
-20
1.186
8
1.000
If compression time t<4s, please ask.
1.230
≥10
1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for fur ther information.
-30
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
compression time is: 2d t (seconds) = Vi
1–8
SUPER CONE FENDERS Clearances
Weight support 0.75H*
1.0H WH
Super Cone fenders can support a lot of static weight. The table is a guide to the permitted weight of front panel before additional support chains may be required.
1.8H
WV
Panel weight (kg)
1.1H
H
0.15H
SCN
Single or multiple horizontal (n ≥ 1)
Multiple vertical (n ≥ 2)
E1
WH ≤ n × 1.0 × W
WV ≤ n × 1.25 × W
E2
WH ≤ n × 1.3 × W
WV ≤ n × 1.625 × W
E3
WH ≤ n × 1.5 × W
WV ≤ n × 1.875 × W
n = number of Super Cones. W = Super Cone weight WH = panel weight – single or multi-horizontal WV = panel weight – single or multi-vertical
* does not allow for bow flares
Interpolate for other grades. Refer to TMS when Super Cone direction is reversed.
There must be enough space around and between Super Cone fenders and the steel panel to allow them to de�ect without interference. Distances given in the above diagram are for guidance. If in doubt, please ask.
äC
Shear
äS
R
Tension
μR F (≤RR)
Super Cones are very stable in shear. The table is a guide to maximum shear de�ections (äS) for different shear coefficients (μ) and rubber grades. Friction coefficients (μ)
If the tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension chains may be required. Please ask for advice on the design of tension chains.
äS
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
E1
7%
9%
11%
14%
E2
9%
11%
14%
17%
E3
11%
17%
18%
22%
äS (max)
usually occurs at
äC = 0.3H to
0.35H.
For äS ≥ 20%, refer to TMS.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–9
SUPER CONE FENDERS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–10
SCK CELL FENDERS SCK Cell fenders have a very long track record and remain popular because of their simplicity, high performance and strength. They come in a wide range of standard sizes and are interchangeable with many older cell fender types.
Features High performance Can support large panels Strong, well-proven design Ideal for low hull pressure systems
Applications Oil and LNG facilities Bulk terminals Offshore platforms Container berths RoRo and cruise terminals Multi-user berths
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–11
SCK CELL FENDERS Dimensions H
ØW
ØB
D
d
Anchors/ head bolts
Weight
SCK 400H
400
650
550
25
30
4 × M22
75
SCK 500H
500
650
550
25
32
4 × M24
95
SCK 630H
630
840
700
25
32
4 × M27
220
SCK 800H
800
1050
900
30
40
6 × M30
400
SCK 1000H
1000
1300
1100
35
45
6 × M36
790
SCK 1150H
1150
1500
1300
40
50
6 × M42
1200
SCK 1250H
1250
1650
1450
40
50
6 × M42
1500
SCK 1450H
1450
1850
1650
42
61
6 × M48
2300
SCK 1600H
1600
2000
1800
45
61
8 × M48
3000
SCK 1700H
1700
2100
1900
50
66
8 × M56
3700
SCK 2000H
2000
2200
2000
50
76
8 × M64
5000
SCK 2250H
2250
2550
2300
57
76
10 × M64
7400
SCK 2500H
2500
2950
2700
70
76
10 × M64
10700
SCK 3000H
3000
3350
3150
75
92
12 × M76
18500 [ Units: mm, kg ]
H
nxd
D
ØW
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
ØB
1–12
SCK CELL FENDERS Rated Performance Data (RPD)* E0.9
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E1.3
E1.4
E1.5
E1.6
E1.7
E1.8
E1.9
E2.0
SCK 400H
ER RR
8.8 50.3
9.8 55.9
10.4 59.4
11.0 62.9
11.6 66.5
12.2 70
12.7 73.5
13.3 77.1
13.9 80.6
14.5 84.1
15.1 87.7
15.7 91.2
SCK 500H
ER RR
16.7 78.6
18.6 87.3
19.8 92.8
20.9 98.3
22.1 104
23.3 109
24.5 115
25.7 120
26.8 126
28 131
29.2 137
30.4 142
SCK 630H
ER RR
34.4 124
38.2 137
40.6 146
42.9 155
45.3 163
47.6 172
50 180
52.4 189
54.7 198
57.1 206
59.4 215
61.8 224
SCK 800H
ER RR
67.1 190
74.5 211
79.5 225
84.5 240
89.5 254
94.5 268
99.5 283
104 297
109 312
114 326
119 341
124 355
SCK 1000H
ER RR
138 314
153 349
163 371
172 393
182 415
191 437
201 458
211 480
220 502
230 524
239 455
249 568
SCK 1150H
ER RR
210 416
233 462
248 491
263 520
277 548
292 577
306 606
321 635
336 664
350 692
365 721
379 750
SCK 1250H
ER RR
269 491
299 545
318 579
337 614
355 648
374 682
393 716
411 750
430 784
449 818
468 852
486 887
SCK 1450H
ER RR
421 661
468 734
497 781
526 828
555 875
585 922
614 969
643 1016
672 1063
702 1110
731 1157
760 1193
SCK 1600H
ER RR
566 805
629 894
668 950
707 1006
746 1062
785 1118
825 1174
864 1230
903 1286
942 1342
982 1397
1021 1453
SCK 1700H
ER RR
678 908
753 1009
800 1072
847 1135
895 1199
942 1262
989 1325
1036 1388
1083 1451
1131 1514
1178 1577
1225 1641
SCK 2000H
ER RR
1104 1258
1227 1397
1304 1485
1380 1572
1457 1659
1534 1746
1610 1833
1687 1920
1764 2007
1840 2094
1917 2181
1994 2268
SCK 2250H
ER RR
1854 1876
2060 2085
2169 2195
2279 2309
2388 2416
2497 2527
2606 2637
2715 2747
2824 2858
2933 2968
3042 3079
3151 3189
SCK 2500H
ER RR
2544 2317
2826 2574
2976 2711
3026 2847
3275 2983
3425 3120
3575 3256
3724 3392
3874 3528
4024 3665
4173 3801
4323 3937
SCK 3000H
ER RR
3795 3310
4217 3678
4452 3879
4688 4080
4923 4281
5158 4482
5394 4683
5629 4884
5865 5085
6100 5286
6335 5487
6571 5688
*in accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: kNm, kN ]
120
100
80 ) % ( n o i t 60 c a e R
120 100
40
80 60
20
40
) % ( y g r e n E
20 0
0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
De�ection (%)
35
40
45
50
55 52.5
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–13
SCK CELL FENDERS Rated Performance Data (RPD)* E2.1
E2.2
E2.3
E2.4
E2.5
E2.6
E2.7
E2.8
E2.9
E3.0
E3.1
E/R ( å)
SCK 400H
ER RR
16.2 93.8
16.7 96.5
17.2 99.1
17.7 102
18.1 104
18.6 107
19.1 110
19.6 112
20.1 115
20.6 118
22.7 129
0.174
SCK 500H
ER RR
31.3 146
32.2 151
33 155
33.9 159
34.8 163
35.7 167
36.6 172
37.4 176
38.3 180
39.2 184
43.1 203
0.213
SCK 630H
ER RR
63.7 230
65.5 237
67.4 244
69.2 250
71.1 257
72.9 264
74.8 270
76.7 277
78.5 284
80.4 290
88.4 319
0.277
SCK 800H
ER RR
128 366
132 377
136 388
140 399
144 409
147 420
151 431
155 442
159 453
163 464
179 510
0.351
SCK 1000H
ER RR
256 585
264 602
271 619
279 636
286 653
294 670
301 687
309 704
316 720
324 737
356 811
0.438
SCK 1150H
ER RR
391 773
402 795
413 818
425 840
436 863
447 886
458 908
470 931
481 953
492 976
541 1073
0.505
SCK 1250H
ER RR
501 913
516 940
530 967
545 993
559 1020
574 1047
589 1073
603 1100
618 1127
633 1153
696 1269
0.548
SCK 1450H
ER RR
783 1229
805 1265
828 1301
851 1337
874 1372
897 1408
919 1444
942 1480
965 1516
988 1551
1086 1707
0.637
SCK 1600H
ER RR
1051 1497
1082 1540
1113 1584
1143 1628
1174 1671
1204 1715
1235 1758
1266 1802
1296 1845
1327 1889
1460 2078
0.702
SCK 1700H
ER RR
1262 1690
1298 1739
1335 1788
1372 1837
1408 1886
1445 1935
1482 1985
1518 2034
1555 2083
1592 2132
1751 2345
0.746
SCK 2000H
ER RR
2054 2336
2113 2403
2173 2470
2233 2538
2293 2605
2353 2673
2412 2740
2472 2807
2532 2875
2592 2942
2851 3236
0.879
SCK 2250H
ER RR
3245 3285
3340 3381
3435 3476
3529 3572
3624 3668
3718 3763
3813 3859
3907 3955
4002 4051
4096 4146
4506 4561
0.988
SCK 2500H
ER RR
4452 4056
4582 4174
4712 4292
4841 4410
4971 4528
5101 4647
5230 4765
5360 4883
5490 5001
5619 5119
6181 5631
1.098
SCK 3000H
ER RR
6761 5856
6952 6023
7143 6191
7334 6358
7525 6526
7716 6693
7906 6860
8097 7028
8288 7195
8479 7363
9327 8099
1.152
*in accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: k Nm, kN ]
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
52.5
55
Ei (%)
0
2
7
16
26
38
50
61
72
83
94
100
106
Ri ( %)
0
32
60
81
94
99
99
96
92
92
96
100
106
Ri Ei
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Di
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing) Angle factor
Temperature factor
Velocity factor For steady state deceleration, the
Angle (°)
AF
Temperature (°C)
TF
Time (seconds)
VF
0
1.000
50
0.882
1
1.005
40
0.926
2
1.002
30
0.969
3
1.001
23
1.000
4
1.001
d = fender de�ection (mm)
5
1.000
Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
6
1.000
3
0.977
5
0.951
8
0.909
10
1.056
10
0.883
0
1.099
15
0.810
20
0.652
-10
1.143
-20
1.186
8
1.000
If compression time t<4s, please ask.
1.230
≥10
1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for fur ther information.
-30
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
compression time is: 2d t (seconds) = Vi
1–14
SCK CELL FENDERS Clearances
Weight support
0.6H*
A
WH
B
WV
Cell fenders can support a lot of static weight. The table is a guide to the permitted weight of front panel before additional support chains may be required.
A
H * does not allow for bow flares
There must be enough space around and between the Cell fenders and the steel panel to allow them to de�ect without interference. Distances given in the above diagram are for guidance. If in doubt, please ask. SCK (H)
Edge (A)
Centres (B)
400
175
700
500
185
700
630
210
880
800
230
1120
1000
255
1500
1150
290
1730
1250
290
1870
1450
350
2180
1600
350
2400
1700
375
2550
2000
430
2880
2250
430
3360
2500
430
3730
3000
510
4500
SCK
Single or multiple horizontal (n≥1)
E1 E2 E3 E1 E2 E3
WH ≤ n × 1.0 × W WH ≤ n × 1.3 × W WH ≤ n × 1.5 × W WH ≤ n × 11 × W0.6 WH ≤ n × 19 × W0.6 WH ≤ n × 25 × W0.6
Multiple vertical (n≥2)
H
WV ≤ n × 1.25 × W WV ≤ n × 1.75 × W ≤800 WV ≤ n × 2.25 × W WV ≤ n × 13.75 × W0.6 WV ≤ n × 23.75 × W0.6 ≥1000 WV ≤ n × 31.25 × W0.6
n = number of Cell fenders. W = SCK weight WH = panel weight – single or multi-horizontal WV = panel weight – single or multi-vertical Interpolate for other grades
Tension
F (≤RR)
If the tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension chains may be required. Please ask for advice on the design of tension chains.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–15
SCK CELL FENDERS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–16
PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS Parallel Motion technology can reduce reaction forces by up to 60% compared with traditional designs. The panel always remains vertical but can cope with large berthing angles – even at 20° there is usually no loss in energy absorption.
Features Ultra-low reaction Non-tilt frontal panel No performance loss at large berthing angles Easy and fast to install Minimal maintenance
Applications RoRo and fast ferry berths LNG and tanker terminals Naval facilities High tidal zones Monopile or ‘soft’ structures
Increasing energy, reducing reaction By using two Super Cones back-to-back, the de�ection and energy both increase whilst reaction forces stay low. Reduced loads compared to conventional fenders mean less stress in the structure, allowing smaller piles and less concrete to be used. As Parallel Motion Fenders are mostly preassembled in the factory, installation is simple and fast. Maintenance is minimal too – contributing to the low service life cost of Parallel Motion technology.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. M1100-S01-V1.1 -EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–17
PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS Comparison of PMF and conven conventional tional fenders 3500 E (kNm) 0°
10°
20°
RPD
å20
1957
1957
1957
1848
100%
Type
Parallel Motion Fender PMF1200 (E3.1 & E1.9)
Super Cone 2 × SCN1200 (E2.7) Cell Fender
1958
1958
1449
3147
43%
3000
Super Cone
) 2500 N k ( 2000 n o i t c1500 a e R
Parallel Motion Fender Cell Fender
1000
1930
2 × SCK1450 (E2.9)
R (kN)
1704
1258
3032
39%
500 0
= Relative Efficiency at 20° angle compared to PMF
0
ε20
6
1200
1600
1
Rubber fender units Shown here are two Super Cones mounted in a back-to-back ‘Twin-Series’ configuration.
2
Closed box panel (frame) Fully sealed, pressure tested design. Shown with optional lead-in bevels which are designed to suit each case.
3
Torsion tube and arm assembly Also closed-box construction, the tube and arms keep the panel vertical whatever level impact loads are applied.
4
Hinge units The maintenance-free stainless steel pins and spherical Trelleborg Orkot® bearings allow free rotation to accommodate berthing angles, also eliminating moments in the hinge pin.
5
UHMW-PE face pads Trelleborg ‘Double Sintered’ UHMW-PE face pads are standard to minimise friction and maximise service intervals.
6
Check chains Check chains (optional) act as rope de�ectors to stop ropes from snagging, and to help with some large angle berthings.
7
Pile jackets (optional) Purpose designed for every project, pile jackets are factory factory built for a perfect fit to to the fender on-site. They can strengthen the structure and double as a corrosion barrier in the vulnerable splash zone. Jackets are also available for monopile systems.
5
1
800
De�ection (mm)
4
7
40 0
2 3
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. M1100-S01-V1.1 -EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–18
PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS Twin-Series Super Cone
Single Super Cone
E (kNm)
R (kN)
SCN 400
47–65
149–204
SCN 500
92–127
SCN 550
MV and MI Element PMF
E (kNm)
R (kN)
E (kNm)
R (kN)
SCN 400
19–38
104–204
MV 400
52–75
284–406
233–318
SCN 500
36–74
164–318
122–169
283–385
SCN 550
49–99
198–385
MV 500
82–117
356–508
SCN 600
156–220
324–440
SCN 600
63–132
225–440
MV 550
99–141
391–558
SCN 700
286–387
462–627
SCN 700
117–226
320–627
MV 600
118–168
427–610
SCN 800
423–581
606–820
SCN 800
171–341
419–820
MV 750
183–262
533–762
SCN 900
602–822
765–1040
SCN 900
248–484
527–1040
MV 800
210–300
568–812
SCN 1000
826–1131
945–1282
SCN 1000
338–666
653–1282
MV 1000
328–468
711–1016
SCN 1050
957–1309
1042–1414
SCN 1050
392–770
720–1414
SCN SC N 11 1100 00 11 1102 02–1 –150 507 7
MV 1250
511–730
889–1270
1145 11 45–1 –155 551 1
SCN 1100
450–886
788–1551
MV 1450
687–982
1030–1472
SCN SC N 12 1200 00 14 1432 32–1 –195 957 7
1361 13 61–1 –184 848 8
SCN 12 1200
585–1150
971–1848
SCN SC N 13 1300 00 18 1816 16–2 –248 486 6
1597 15 97–2 –216 167 7
SCN 13 1300
743–1463
1103–2167
MV 1600
837–1196
1138–1626
SCN SC N 14 1400 00 22 2268 68–3 –310 104 4
1853 18 53–2 –251 514 4
SCN 14 1400
927–1826
1278–2514
MI 2000
1295–1850
1295–1850
SCN SC N 16 1600 00 33 3385 85–4 –436 367 7
2418 24 18–3 –327 278 8
SCN 16 1600 00 13 1382 82–2 –272 728 8
1670 16 70–3 –327 278 8
SCN SC N 18 1800 00 48 4817 17–6 –659 599 9
3060 30 60–4 –415 153 3
SCN 18 1800 00 19 1967 67–3 –388 883 3
2115 21 15–4 –425 253 3
SCN SC N 20 2000 00 66 6609 09–9 –904 044 4
3778 37 78–5 –512 126 6
SCN 20 2000 00 27 2700 00–5 –532 324 4
2610 26 10–5 –521 216 6
MV and MI Elements are not PIAN C Type Approved. Performances are based on a pair of 1000mm long elements. Pro-rata for more elements or different lengths.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. M1100-S01-V1.1 -EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–19
PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS Proven in practice
Typical footprint
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. M1100-S01-V1.1 -EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–20
UNIT ELEMENTS Unit Elements are high-performance, PIANC Type Approved modular rubber fenders. Elements are versatile and can be combined in unlimited combinations of length and direction. The simplest Unit Element system is the UE-V fender, with pairs of legs and a UHMW-PE non-marking shield. For heavy duty applications Unit Elements are combined with a steel panel (frame) which can cope with belting, bow �ares, low hull pressures and high tides.
Features PIANC Type Approved Versatile modular system Highly efficient shape Symmetrical or asymmetrical fixings Strong in lengthwise shear Easy to install Low maintenance
Applications Container terminals Tanker Berths RoRo and cruise ships Dolphins and monopiles Bulk and general cargo berths Fender walls Small craft berths
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–21
UNIT ELEMENTS Element
H
A
B*
UE250
C*
D
F
J
M
W
K
E
Anchors
250
109
114
71
20–27
152
33
25–35
218
UE300
300
130
UE400
400
165
138
84
23–32
184
187
102
25–35
248
38
30–40
41
30–40
UE500
500
195
229
119
28–37
306
42
UE550
550
210
252
126
32–38
336
UE600
600
225
275
133
35–45
UE700
700
270
UE750
750
285
321
163
344
170
UE800
800
300
366
UE900
900
335
UE1000
1000
UE1200
1200
UE1400 UE1600
50
300
M20
38
260
50
300
M24
54
330
250
500
M24
89
40–52
390
250
500
M30
135
42
40–52
420
250
500
M30
153
366
42
40–52
450
250
500
M30
179
35–45
428
56
50–65
540
250
500
M36
247
38–45
458
56
50–65
570
250
500
M36
298
178
38–45
488
56
50–65
600
250
500
M36
338
412
198
42–50
550
60
57–80
670
250
500
M42
410
365
458
212
46–58
610
60
57–80
730
250
500
M42
509
435
557
252
46–60
748
61
65–90
870
250
500
M48
717
1400
495
642
281
50–65
856
67
65–90
990
250
500
M48
948
1600
565
733
321
50–65
978
76
75–100
1130
250
500
M56
1236
* Asymmetrical bolting version only.
Weight
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
2000L
Asymmetrical bolting
1500L 1000L
J B
C
M
Symmetrical bolting H
K
E
E
E
D
J
K
A F
W
J
Element lengths H
L
UE 250 UE 300 UE 400 UE 500–UE 550 UE 600–UE 800 UE 900–UE 1200 UE 1400 UE 1600
600
750
900
1000
1200
1400
1500
1800
2000
Max
2800 2000 2000 1500 2000 1500 2000 2000
preferred lengths
typical non-standard lengths
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
For elements with L/H < 1.0 or non- standard lengths, please ask for advice.
1–22
UNIT ELEMENTS Rated Performance Data (RPD)* E0.9
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E1.3
E1.4
E1.5
E1.6
E1.7
E1.8
E1.9
E2.0
UE 250
ER RR
8.1 79
9.0 88
9.3 90
9.6 93
9.9 95
10.2 98
10.5 100
10.8 103
11.1 106
11.4 108
11.7 111
12.0 113
UE 300
ER RR
11.7 95
13.0 105
13.4 108
13.8 111
14.2 114
14.6 117
15.0 121
15.4 124
15.8 127
16.2 130
16.6 133
17.0 136
UE 400
ER RR
21 113
23 126
24 130
24 134
25 137
26 141
27 145
27 149
28 153
29 156
29 160
30 164
UE 500
ER RR
32.4 142
36 158
37.1 163
38.2 167
39.3 172
40.4 177
41.5 182
42.6 186
43.7 191
44.8 196
45.9 200
47 205
UE 550
ER RR
40 157
44 174
45 179
47 184
48 190
49 195
51 200
52 205
53 210
54 216
56 221
57 226
UE 600
ER RR
47 171
52 190
54 196
55 201
57 207
58 212
60 218
62 224
63 229
65 235
66 240
68 246
UE 700
ER RR
63 199
70 221
72 228
74 234
77 241
79 247
81 254
83 261
85 267
88 274
90 280
92 287
UE 750
ER RR
73 214
81 238
84 245
86 252
89 259
91 266
94 274
96 281
99 288
101 295
104 302
106 309
UE 800
ER RR
84 228
93 253
96 261
99 268
101 276
104 283
107 291
110 299
113 306
115 314
118 321
121 329
UE 900
ER RR
106 256
118 284
122 293
125 301
129 310
132 318
136 327
139 336
143 344
146 353
150 361
153 370
UE 1000
ER RR
131 284
146 316
150 326
155 335
159 345
163 354
168 364
172 373
176 383
180 392
185 402
189 411
UE 1200
ER RR
186 340
207 378
213 389
220 401
226 412
232 424
239 435
245 446
251 458
257 469
264 481
270 492
UE 1400
ER RR
257 398
286 442
294 455
303 469
311 482
320 495
328 509
336 552
345 535
353 548
362 562
370 575
UE 1600
ER RR
337 455
374 506
385 521
396 535
407 552
418 567
429 582
440 597
451 612
462 628
473 643
484 658
* In accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: k Nm, kN ]
Values are for a single element, 1000mm long.
120
100
80
) % ( n o i t 60 c a e R
120 100
40
80 )
60 % ( 20
40 20
0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
De�ection (%)
40
45
50
y g r e n E
0 60
55 57.5
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–23
UNIT ELEMENTS Rated Performance Data (RPD)* E2.1
E2.2
E2.3
E2.4
E2.5
E2.6
E2.7
E2.8
E2.9
E3.0
E3.1
E/R
UE 250
ER RR
12.3 117
12.6 120
12.9 124
13.2 127
13.5 131
13.8 134
14.1 138
14.4 141
14.7 145
15.0 148
16.5 163
0.103
UE 300
ER RR
17.5 140
180 144
18.5 149
19.0 153
19.5 157
20.0 161
20.5 165
21.0 170
21.5 174
22.0 178
24.2 196
0.124
UE 400
ER RR
31 169
32 174
33 179
34 184
35 189
35 194
36 199
37 204
38 209
39 214
43 235
0.183
UE 500
ER RR
48.5 211
50 217
51.5 224
53 230
54.5 236
56 242
57.5 248
59 255
60.5 261
62 267
38.2 294
0.230
UE 550
ER RR
59 233
61 240
62 246
64 253
66 260
68 267
70 274
71 280
73 287
75 294
83 323
0.254
UE 600
ER RR
70 253
72 261
74 268
76 276
79 283
81 290
83 298
85 305
87 313
89 320
98 352
0.276
UE 700
ER RR
95 296
98 305
100 313
103 322
106 331
109 340
112 349
114 357
117 366
120 375
132 413
0.319
UE 750
ER RR
109 318
112 328
115 337
118 347
122 356
125 365
128 375
131 384
134 394
137 403
151 443
0.341
UE 800
ER RR
125 339
128 349
132 358
135 368
139 378
143 388
146 398
150 407
153 417
157 427
173 470
0.368
UE 900
ER RR
158 381
162 392
167 403
171 414
176 426
181 437
185 448
190 459
194 470
199 481
219 529
0.414
UE 1000
ER RR
195 423
200 436
206 448
212 460
218 473
223 485
229 497
235 509
240 522
246 534
271 587
0.461
UE 1200
ER RR
278 507
286 522
294 537
302 552
311 567
319 582
327 597
335 612
343 627
351 642
386 706
0.548
UE 1400
ER RR
381 592
392 610
404 627
415 644
426 662
437 679
448 696
460 713
471 731
482 748
530 823
0.645
UE 1600
ER RR
499 678
513 697
528 717
542 736
557 756
572 776
586 795
601 815
615 834
630 854
693 939
0.737
* In accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: k Nm, kN ]
Values are for a single element, 1000mm long.
example
Intermediate deflections D(%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55 57.5 62.5
E(%)
0
1
5
12
21
32
43
54
65
75
84
95
100 113
R(%)
0
23
47
69
87
97
100
97
90
85
84
92
100 121
Ri Ei
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Di
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing) Angle factor*
Temperature factor
Velocity factor For steady state deceleration, the
Angle (°)
AF
Temperature (°C)
TF
Time (seconds)
VF
0
1.000
50
0.882
1
1.020
40
0.926
2
1.008
30
0.969
3
1.005
23
1.000
4
1.003
d = fender de�ection (mm)
5
1.002
Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
6
1.001
3
0.960
5
0.936
8
0.901
10
1.056
10
0.878
0
1.099
15
0.818
20
0.755
-10
1.143
-20
1.186
8
1.000
If compression time t<4s, please ask.
1.230
≥10
1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for fur ther information.
-30
* G/H = 0.7; D1 = 57.5% (refer to website for full angular tables).
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
compression time is: 2d t (seconds) = Vi
1–24
UE SYSTEMS Clearances
Weight support capacity H
0.65H†
H
2P
L
L
2P
G
P WH
WV
P
Unit Element fenders can support a lot of weight. The table is a guide to the permitted weight of front panel before additional support chains may be required. Panel weight (kg)
P
UE
2P*
Single or multiple horizontal (n ≥ 1)
Single or multiple vertical (n ≥ 1)
E1
WH ≤ n × 690 × H × L
WV ≤ n × 1230 × H × L
E2
WH ≤ n × 900 × H × L
WV ≤ n × 1600 × H × L
E3
WH ≤ n × 1170 × H × L
WV ≤ n × 2080 × H × L
n = number of element pairs WH = panel weight – elements ‘V’ on elevation WV = panel weight – elements ‘V’ on plan
H Element
Pmin
UE 250 – UE 300
30
UE 400 – UE 1600
50
Interpolate for other grades
Fenders in tension
[ Units: mm ]
There must be enough space around and between Unit Element fenders and the steel panel to allow them to de�ect without interference. Distances given in the above diagram are for guidance. If in doubt, please ask.
* Always check edge distances to suite concrete grade and reinforcement. † Dimension does no allow for bow �ares, berthing angles or other effects which may reduce clearances.
F
If the tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension chains may be required. Please ask for advice on the design of tension chains.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–25
UE SYSTEMS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–26
UE V-FENDERS Pairs of Unit Elements can be combined with a UHMW-PE shield into a V-shape to make a simple, economical and multi-purpose fender. The shield can be narrow or wide, and can also span several pairs of elements to make very long fenders. Please ask for advice about UE-V fenders which use UE 900 or larger elements.
Type V1
Type V2
Features Simple, modular design Low-friction shield Non-marking face Reduced hull pressure Easy maintenance
Type V3 Applications Multi-user berths Small RoRo terminals Workboat berths Pontoon fenders
Element
Pmin
UE 250 – UE 300
30
UE 400 – UE 1600
50
[ Units: mm ]
Type V1
Type V2
Type V3
H
S
G
S
G
S
G
P
T
UE 250
250
250
250
460
UE 300
300
290
290
UE 400
400
370
UE 500
500
UE 550
Anchors
250
460
460
30
70
M20
550
290
550
550
30
70
M24
370
690
370
690
690
50
80
M24
440
440
830
440
830
830
50
90
M30
550
470
470
890
470
890
890
50
90
M30
UE 600
600
500
500
950
500
950
950
50
90
M30
UE 700
700
590
590
1130
590
1130
1130
50
100
M36
UE 750
750
620
620
1190
620
1190
1190
50
100
M36
UE 800
800
640
640
1230
640
1230
1230
50
100
M36 [ Units: mm ]
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–27
UE V-FENDERS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–28
ARCH FENDERS Arch fenders are simple and rugged, providing reliable and trouble-free service for a wide variety of ber ths even under the most severe conditions. The AN-fender is a traditional rubber faced unit whilst the ANP-fender can be fitted with either UHMW-PE face pads or connected to a steel panel.
Features Simple one-piece design Strong and hard wearing Excellent shear performance Large range of standard sizes
Applications RoRo berths General cargo Workboat harbours Barge and tug berths
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–29
ARCH FENDERS Lmax
H
A
B
W
F
D
K
E
P×Q
Anchors
Weight AN ANP
AN / ANP 150
3000
150
108
240
326
98
16–20
50
500
20 × 40
M16
28
35
AN / ANP 200
3000
200
142
320
422
130
18–25
50
500
25 × 50
M20
48
62
AN / ANP 250
3500
250
164
400
500
163
20–30
62.5
500
28 × 56
M24
69
90
AN / ANP 300
3500
300
194
480
595
195
25–32
75
500
28 × 56
M24
107
128
AN / ANP 400
3500
400
266
640
808
260
25–32
100
500
35 × 70
M30
185
217
AN / ANP 500
3500
500
318
800
981
325
25–32
125
500
42 × 84
M36
278
352
AN / ANP 600
3000
600
373
960
1160
390
28–40
150
500
48 × 96
M42
411
488
AN / ANP 800
3000
800
499
1300
1550
520
41–50
200
500
54 × 108
M48
770
871
AN / ANP 1000
3000
1000
580
1550
1850
650
50–62
250
500
54 × 108
M48
1289
1390
[Units: mm, k g/m ]
H
AN Arch fender K
E
E
K
B
D
W
F
A
ANP Arch fender X
Y
Q P
T
V
C
U
L (≤Lmax) UHMW-PE face pads
ANP 150 ANP 200 ANP 250 ANP 300 ANP 400 ANP 500 ANP 600 ANP 800 ANP 1000
Steel frame
U
V
C
X
Y
T
Bolt size
X
Y
49 65 45 50 60 65 65 70 80
0 0 73 95 140 195 260 380 490
20–30 30–45 30–45 30–45 30–50 30–50 35–60 50–70 50–70
60–70 60–70 70–85 70–85 70–85 70–85 70–85 70–85 70–85
330–410 330–410 330–410 330–410 330–410 330–410 330–410 330–410 330–410
30 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60
M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M20 M20 M24 M24
70–90 70–90 70–90 70–90 70–90 70–90 70–90 70–90 70–90
250–300 250–300 250–300 250–300 250–300 250–300 250–300 250–300 250–300
Larger bolts are required when connecting ANP fenders to steel panels. Refer to TMS.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
[Units: mm ]
L
Anchors
1000
6 No
1500
8 No
2000
10 No
2500
12 No
3000
14 No
3500
16 No
Non-standard lengths, profiles and bolting patterns are available on request.
1–30
AN FENDER Rated Performance Data (RPD)* 160 140 120
E1.0
E1.5
E2.0
E2.5
E3.0
AN 150
ER 4.3 RR 74.0
5.0 85.1
5.6 96.2
6.5 112
7.4 127
AN 200
ER 7.6 RR 98.6
8.8 113
10.0 128
11.6 149
13.1 169
AN 250
ER 11.9 RR 123
13.8 142
15.6 160
18.1 186
20.5 211
AN 300
ER 17.1 RR 148
19.8 170
22.5 192
26.0 223
29.5 253
AN 400
ER 30.5 RR 197
35.3 227
40.0 256
46.3 297
52.5 338
AN 500
ER 47.6 RR 247
55.0 284
62.4 321
72.2 372
82.0 422
AN 600
ER 68.6 RR 296
79.3 341
89.9 385
103 446
116 507
AN 800
ER RR
122 394
141 454
160 513
185 594
210 675
AN 1000
ER RR
191 493
221 567
250 641
289 743
328 844
100 ) % ( n 80 o i t c a e 60 R
120 100 80 ) %
40
( y g r 40 e n E
60 20
20 0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 51.5% De�ection (%)
0 0
5
*In Accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: k N, k Nm ]
Performance per metre length.
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
51.5
55
Ei (%)
0
1
6
14
25
37
50
63
74
85
96
100
111
Ri (%)
0
24
51
73
89
98
100
96
89
82
91
100
141
Ri Ei Di
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing) Angle factor
Temperature factor
Velocity factor For steady state deceleration, the
Angle (°)
AF
Temperature (°C)
TF
Time (seconds)
VF
0
1.000
50
0.882
1
1.014
40
0.926
2
1.005
30
0.969
3
1.004
23
1.000
4
1.003
d = fender de�ection (mm)
5
1.003
Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
6
1.002
3
0.963
5
0.952
8
0.939
10
1.056
10
0.924
0
1.099
15
0.817
20
0.535
compression time is: 2d t (seconds) = Vi
-10
1.143
-20
1.186
8
1.000
If compression time t<4s, please ask.
-30
1.230
≥10
1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for fur ther information.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–31
ANP FENDER Rated Performance Data (RPD)* 140
120
100 ) % 80 ( n o i t c a e 60 R
140 120 100
40
80 )
% ( 60 y g r 40 e n E
20
20
E1.0
E1.5
E2.0
E2.5
E3.0
ER 5.6 ANP 150 RR 88.8
6.5 102
7.3 115
8.4 133
9.5 150
ANP 200
ER RR
9.9 118
11.4 136
13 154
14.9 177
16.8 200
ANP 250
ER 15.6 RR 148
17.9 170
20.2 192
23.3 221
26.3 250
ANP 300
ER 22.4 RR 178
25.8 205
29.1 231
33.5 266
37.8 300
ANP 400
ER 39.8 RR 237
45.8 273
51.7 308
59.5 354
67.2 400
ANP 500
ER 62.1 RR 296
71.5 341
80.8 385
92.9 443
105 500
ANP 600
ER 89.3 RR 355
103 409
116 462
134 531
151 600
ANP 800
ER RR
159 473
183 544
207 615
238 708
269 800
ANP 1000
ER RR
249 592
286 681
323 769
372 420 885 1000
0
0 0
5
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 54% De�ection (%)
*In Accordance with PIANC.
[ Units: kN, kNm ]
Performance per metre length.
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
54
57.5
Ei (%)
0
1
6
13
23
34
46
58
70
81
91
100
110
Ri (%)
0
23
49
71
87
96
100
98
92
84
84
100
139
Ri Ei Di
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing) Angle factor
Temperature factor
Velocity factor For steady state deceleration, the
Angle (°)
AF
Temperature (°C)
TF
Time (seconds)
VF
0
1.000
50
0.882
1
1.008
40
0.926
2
1.003
30
0.969
3
1.002
23
1.000
4
1.001
d = fender de�ection (mm)
5
1.000
Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
6
1.000
3
0.945
5
0.905
8
0.840
10
1.056
10
0.794
0
1.099
15
0.669
20
0.529
-10
1.143
-20
1.186
8
1.000
If compression time t<4s, please ask.
-30
1.230
≥10
1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for fur ther information.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
compression time is: 2d t (seconds) = Vi
1–32
CORNER ARCH Berth corners are very difficult to protect. Corner Arch fenders are available in three standard sizes and provide a simple, easily installed solution to prevent damage from smaller vessels.
Other corner fender solutions
L
F
Donut M
L
K
Wheels J
0.25H H
B
D
W
Dimensions H
Fender Bars
L
W
B
D
F
J
K
CA 150 150 1000 300
240
25
CA 250 250
750 500
410
CA 300 300
625 600
490
M
Anchors
Weight
95
110
690
237 8 × M20
28
40
160
130
420
262 8 × M24
46
44
190
140
360
200 8 × M30
68
[ Units: mm, kg ]
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1–33
ARCH FENDERS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S01-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Modular Fenders
MV Elements V Fenders MI Elements
Section 2
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S02-V1.1-EN
2–2
MV ELEMENTS MV-elements are the foundation of many fender systems. These modular units are compression moulded from a high performance polymer which resists attack from ultraviolet light, ozone and immersion in seawater for long service life and low maintenance. Available in a full range of sizes, the geometry of the MV-element has been optimised for maximum energy absorption per unit volume of rubber combined with a low reaction force. Fully encapsulated steel mounting plates are vulcanised inside the MV-element to allow easy fixing. Bolts are located centrally on the base �anges to reduce stresses, but being recessed into pockets the fixings are well protected from damage.
Features Modular design system Many standard sizes High performance geometry Recessed fixings Long life, low maintenance
Applications All vessel types which use the following systems: Fender piles V-fenders Multiple fenders Pivot pillars Parallel Motion (Torsion Arm)
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–3
MV ELEMENT
Each fender generation provides more energy for the same reaction force. n o i t c a e R
ENERGY
De�ection
Fender Evolution Ships have grown larger – so have the demands on fenders. A century ago timber (1st Generation) was cheap and worked adequately for the small vessels of the day. Old tyres (2nd Generation) were abundant and softer but required expensive maintenance and absorbed little energy. Cylindricals (3rd Generation) were the first purpose designed fenders, gaining popularity some 50 years ago, but inefficient use of rubber and low performance by today’s standards makes them costly. Arch and simple buckling fenders (4th Generation) had better performance and integrated the rubber with steel fixing plates.
MV-element
V-fender
5th Generation Fenders MV-elements are 5th Generation fenders. With refined geometry the rubber has a characteristic double-buckle ‘S’ shape. This gives the MV-element a greater de�ection for the same reaction so it absorbs more energy than all previous generations with less material. System fender
Modular Design MV-elements are modular so can be installed horizontally or vertically, close together or further apart, with the ‘V’ facing towards or away from the panel. ‘A’ and ‘B’ compounds can be mixed or different lengths used – allowing almost limitless permutations and giving the designer greater control on how an MV-system behaves when impacted.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–4 MV300 elements up to 3000mm available on request.
MV ELEMENT Dimensions L
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
T
Anchor
600 MV300
MV400
27
3+3
41
1200
4+4
54
1500
5+5
68
900
150
300
150
300
94
93
47
17
M20
750
125
125
2+2
50
1000
250
250
2+2
66
1500
250
3+3
99
2000
250
4+4
132
2500
250
250
5+5
165
3000
250
250
6+6
198
750
125
125
2+2
84
2+2
111
3+3
167
4+4
222
2500
5+5
278
3000
6+6
334
2+2
100
2+2
132
3+3
200
2+2
115
2+2
153
3+3
230
2+2
180
2+2
239
3+3
359
2+2
214
2+2
268
3+3
402
4+4
536
1500 2000
750 MV550
1000 1500 750
MV600
1000 1500 750
MV750
1000 1500 800
MV800
500
250 250
500
125
124
63
17
M24
250
125 250
250
500
500
142
87
20
M30
250
500
172
170
87
20
M30
250
500
188
199
87
20
M30
125 500
150
250
158
125
125 250
250
500
125
125
1000 1500
500
250
500
235
230
118
26
M36
150 500
250
500
250
240
129
26
M36
2000
MV1000
Weight
2+2
1000 MV500
Holes
800
150
150
2+2
346
850
175
175
2+2
368
900
200
200
2+2
389
950
225
225
2+2
411
1000
250
250
2+2
432
1050
275
2+2
454
1100
300
300
2+2
476
1150
325
325
2+2
497
1200
350
350
2+2
519
250
250
3+3
648
4+4
864
1500 2000
500
275
500
322
310
162
31
M42
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–5
MV ELEMENT Dimensions
MV1250
L
B
800
150
150
2+2
511
850
175
175
2+2
543
900
200
200
2+2
575
950
225
225
2+2
607
1000
250
250
2+2
639
1050
275
2+2
671
1100
300
2+2
703
1150
325
325
2+2
735
1200
350
350
2+2
767
1250
375
375
2+2
799
250
250
3+3
959
4+4
1278
900
200
200
2+2
786
1000
250
250
2+2
873
1100
300
2+2
960
1200
350
2+2
1048
3+3
1310
4+4
1746
1500 2000
MV1450
1500
500
500
D
275 300
300 350
E
F
500
G
401
500
388
454
445
J
T
202
Anchor
36
228
M48
41
M48
Holes
Weight
250
250
1000
250
250
2+2
1114
1100
300
300
2+2
1226
1200
350
2+2
1337
3+3
1671
4+4
2228
2000
MV1600
C
1500 2000
250
500
350
500
507
480
261
50
M56
250
[ Units: mm, kg ]
F G
Internal steel plate
J
D
E
B
C
E
D
C
B
H
T
T M
F
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
L
2–6
MV ELEMENT Rated Performance Data (RPD)* L
MV400
MV500
Compound A E
R
E
R
91.4 137
8.8 13.2
25.2 31.5
183 229
17.7 22.1
750 1000
26.9 37.4
146 203
18.8 26.2
102
1500 2000 2500
56.1 74.8 93.5
305 406 508
39.3 52.3 65.4
213 284
3000
112
609
78.5
356 427
750 1000 1500
41.2
179
28.9
125
58.4 87.6
254 381
40.9 61.3
178 267
2000
117 49.9
508 197
81.8 34.9
356 138
70.7 106
279 419
49.5 74.2
196 293 151
900 1200 1500
MV550
750 1000 1500 750 1000 1500
59.4
215
41.6
MV600
84.1 126
305 457
58.9 88.3
750 1000
90.4 131
262 381
63.2 92
MV750
MV800
MV1000
MV1250
MV1450
MV1600
64
d
96 128 160
H
142
213 320 183 267
1500
197
571
138
800 1000
111 150
302 406
77.8 105
1500 2000
224 299
609 813
157 209
800 850
175 189
380 412
122 133
569 266 288
900
204
444
143
311
950 1000 1050 1100
219
476
153
333
234 248 263
508 540 572
164 174 184
356 378
1150 1200
278 293
604 636
195 205
1500 2000
350 467
762 1016
245 327
800 850
269 293
468 510
188 205
327 357
900 950 1000
317 341 365
551 593 635
222 239 256
386 415
1050 1100
389 413
677 718
272 289
474
1150 1200
437 461
760 802
306 323
1250 1500
485 548
844 952
340 383
2000
730
1270
511
900 1000
426 491
638 736
298 344
1100 1200
557 622
835 933
390 436
516 584 653
1500 2000
737 982
1105 1473
516 688
773 1031
1000 1100 1200
598 690 781
813 937 1061
419 483 547
569 656
1500 2000
897 1196
1219 1625
628 837
All performance values are for a single element.
L
R
Compound B
12.6 18.9
600 MV300
F
*Rated Performance Dat a (RPD)
Method: Decreasing Velocity (DV) Temperature: 23ºC Initial speed: 150mm/s Compression angle: 0º Refer to p2–7.
400 212 284 427
400 423 445 533 711
444 503 532 561 591 667 889 447
743 853 1138
[ Units: kNm, kN ]
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–7
MV ELEMENT
120
100
80
) % ( n o i t c a 60 e R
120 100
40
80 60
20
40 20
0
) % ( y g r e n E
0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
De�ection (%)
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
28
35
40
45
50
57.5 62.5
Ei (%)
0
2
7
14
24
41
56
66
76
85
100
113
Ri (%)
0
31
58
78
92
100
96
90
85
84
100
130
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Decreasing Velocity (DV) test method The Trelleborg high-speed test press was developed to simulate real berthing conditions for MV and MI elements. Depending on element size, initial speeds exceeding 300mm/s are achievable. The test press can accommodate single elements from MV500 to MV1600 as well as the MI2000 in lengths up to 1500mm. Please refer to Trelleborg Marine Systems for all special test requirements.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
55 60 57.5
Ri
Ei Di
2–8
MV SYSTEMS Element spacing
r = rated de�ection 0.35H
H
Weight support
r=0.575H
0.24H 0.78H
H
MV-elements can support a lot of weight. The table is a guide to the permitted weight of the front panel in tonnes per metre of element pair before additional support chains may be required. WH
WV
Panel weight* (kg)
1.2H
0.32H
MV
Single or multiple horizontal
Single or multiple vertical
Compound A
WH ≤ 1.0 × H × L
WV ≤ 1.78 × H × L
Compound B
W H ≤ 0.7 × H × L
WV ≤ 1.25 × H × L
* per pair of elements.
≥50
0.72H
Shear stiffness Some temporary shear may be caused by friction as the MV-elements are compressed. Maximum shear usually occurs at approximately 28% de�ection.
DL F L
0.12H
DL ≈ 0.39 × μ × H DT ≈ 0.82 × μ × H H
MV-elements can be mounted horizontally or vertically. There must be enough space around and between MV-element fenders and the steel panel to allow them to de�ect without interference. Distances given in the diagram are for guidance. If in doubt, contact your local office.
F T
Where, H = fender height μ = friction coefficient
R
DT
Tension If the likely tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension chains may be required. Please refer to your local office.
F
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–9
MV SYSTEMS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–10
V-FENDERS V-fenders fulfil the need for a simple, and maintenance-free fender system with high performance and a robust design at low costs. All V-fenders use one or several pairs of MV-elements and a front shield. The shield is a structural component of the fender, directly bolted to the MV-element and easily able to withstand constant use in busy harbours. The UHMW-PE face is also very gentle on ships. It will conform to the contours of the hull, will not mark paint (unlike rubber) and does not spark. UHMW-PE has very low friction which reduces stresses in the V-fenders and fixings.
Applications General cargo quays Berthing dolphins Pontoon fendering Passenger ferry berths Offshore platforms Long fender walls
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–11
V-FENDERS Dimensions
Performance (per metre)
H
T(min)
MV300P*
Compound A
Compound B
E
E
R
305
29.5
213
74.8
406
52.4
284
M30
117
508
81.8
356
320
M30
141
558
99.0
392
894
322
M30
168
610
118
426
900
1136
440
M36
262
762
184
534
1170
960
1218
480
M36
300
812
210
568
900
1330
1200
1524
580
M42
468
1016
328
712
1140
1660
1500
1904
724
M48
730
1270
512
888
So
MW
SW
A
B
C
Fixings
70
370
270
410
360
454
172
M20
42.0
MV400P
80
480
360
500
480
606
232
M24
MV500P
90
590
460
660
600
774
316
MV550P
90
640
500
750
660
834
MV600P
90
690
530
800
720
MV750P
100
850
680
1010
MV800P
100
900
730
MV1000P
120
1120
MV1250P
120
1370
Please ask for other dimensions
[ Units: mm ]
R
[ Units: kNm, kN ]
* MV300 not available in 1000mm length (refer to p2–4). Performance is for a pair of elements, 1000mm long.
L L SW C
MW C
B
B
A
H
H SO
A
T
Always specify ‘P’ type elements for V-fenders (ie. MV500P). These have special internal plates designed to flex with the UHMW-PE shield. The flange marked ‘Panel Side’ should be connected to the shield.
All V-fender performances are based on decreasing velocity (DV) method compression testing of full size elements. Performances are valid for 150mm/ s initial impact velocity, 23°C ambient temperature and 0° compression angle. Site operating conditions or project specifications may differ from the above. Please ask your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office for further details, or visit our web site.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
SO T
2–12
MI-2000 ELEMENTS MI-2000 fender systems suit very large vessels and high energy applications. They share the modular design concept with MV elements but with a modified fixing arrangement to allow greater de�ections and efficiency. The rubber unit is available in several standard lengths and rubber grades which, combined with the modularity of the MI system, provides designers with greater choice and versatility.
Features Modular design system Choice of lengths and rubber grades High performance and efficiency Long, life, low maintenance
Applications Ideal for larger vessels including: Tankers and LNG ships Bulk carriers Post-Panamax containers Mega cruise ships
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–13
MI-2000 ELEMENTS MI-2000 Dimensions B A
B
C
Anchor
Holes
Weight
1000
1270
1130
M42
6+6
1840
1050
1320
1180
M42
6+6
1941
1100
1370
1230
M42
6+6
2042
1150
1420
1280
M42
6+6
2144
1200
1470
1330
M42
6+6
2245
1250
1520
1380
M42
6+6
2346
1300
1570
1430
M42
6+6
2447
1350
1620
1480
M42
6+6
2549
1400
1670
1530
M42
6+6
2650
A 2000
1318 52
733
210 210
H C
585
[ Units: mm, kg ]
MI-2000S Dimensions A
B
C
Anchor
Holes
Weight*
1000
1270
1130
M42
6+6
2191
1050
1320
1180
M42
6+6
2286
1100
1370
1230
M42
6+6
2383
1150
1420
1280
M42
6+6
2480
1200
1470
1330
M42
6+6
2573
1250
1520
1380
M42
6+6
2670
1300
1570
1430
M42
6+6
2765
1350
1620
1480
M42
6+6
2860
1400
1670
1530
M42
6+6
2957
B A 2000 1318 52 75
733
210 210 H
585
C
[ Units: mm, kg ]
W
210 75 thick 210
C
* MI-2000S weight includes fabricated spacers for both �anges (supplied with fender elements on request).
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
620
2–14
MI-2000 MI-2000 Performance 140
A
1000
120
1050
100 1100 ) % ( 80 n o i t c a 60 e R
140 120
1200
100
40
80 ) % 60 ( y
20
40 20
0
1150
0
10
20
30 40 De�ection (%)
50
60 62
g r e n E
1250 1300 1350
0 1400
Compound A
Compound B
ER
925
565
RR
925
565
ER
971
593
RR
971
593
ER
1017
621
RR
1017
621
ER
1063
650
RR
1063
650
ER
1110
678
RR
1110
678
ER
1156
706
RR
1156
706
ER
1202
734
RR
1202
734
ER
1248
763
RR
1248
763
ER
1295
791
RR
1295
791
All values are for
[ Units: k N, k Nm ]
a single element.
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Ei (%)
0
2
6
14
23
32
42
52
61
71
79
88
96 100 103
Ri (%)
0
34
63
84
95
99 100 98
95
91
86
82
90 100 127
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
62
65
Ri
Ei Di
All MI-2000 performance values are based on decreasing velocity (DV) method compression testing of full size elements on a dedicated high speed test press. Performances are valid for 150mm/s initial impact velocity, 23°C ambient temperature and 0° compression angle. Site operating conditions or project specifications may differ from the above. Please ask your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office for further details, or visit our web site.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
2–15
MI-2000S MI-2000S Performance 140
A
1000
120
1050
100 1100 ) % ( 80 n o i t c a 60 e R
140 120
1200
100
40
80 ) % 60 ( y
20
40 20
0
1150
0
10
20
30 40 De�ection (%)
50
g r e n E
1250 1300 1350
0
60
1400
66
Compound A
Compound B
ER
989
604
RR
925
565
ER
1039
635
RR
971
593
ER
1088
665
RR
1017
621
ER
1138
695
RR
1063
650
ER
1187
725
RR
1110
678
ER
1237
756
RR
1156
706
ER
1286
786
RR
1202
734
ER
1336
816
RR
1248
763
ER
1385
846
RR
1295
791
All values are for
[ Units: kN, kNm ]
a single element.
example
Intermediate deflections Di (%)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Ei (%)
0
2
6
13
21
30
40
49
58
67
75
82
90 100 103
Ri ( %)
0
35
63
83
95
99 100 98
94
90
85
81
81 100 110
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
All MI-2000S performance values are based on decreasing velocity (DV) method compression testing of full size elements on a dedicated high speed test press. Performances are valid for 150mm/s initial impact velocity, 23°C ambient temperature and 0° compression angle. Site operating conditions or project specifications may differ from the above. Please ask your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office for further details, or visit our web site.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S02-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
66 67.5
Ri
Ei Di
Multi-purpose Fenders
Cylindricals Extrusions Composites Fender Bars MPP Ramp & Cope Shear Section 3
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S03-V1.1-EN
3–2
CYLINDRICAL FENDERS Cylindrical Fenders have protected ships for more years than any other fender type. Cylindrical fenders are simple and versatile as well as being easy to install. Their progressive reaction makes them ideal for berths serving large and small vessels. The wide range of available sizes (as well as almost any intermediate size) means Cylindrical Fenders can be closely matched to each application.
Features Simple and economical design Easy to install and maintain All sizes up to 2700mm diameter Thick wall resists abrasion and wear Progressive load-de�ection curve
Applications Bulk cargo berths General cargo quays RoRo and ferry terminals Fishing and workboat berths Pontoons and �oating structures Tug havens
L
OD ID
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–3
CYLINDRICAL FENDERS OD × ID (mm)
OD / ID
E (kNm)
R (kN)
P* (kN/m2)
Weight (kg/m)
100 × 50
2.00
0.8
43
547
7.2
125 × 65
1.92
1.3
51
500
11.0
150 × 75
2.00
1.8
65
552
16.3
175 × 75
2.33
2.7
92
781
24.1
200 × 100
2.00
3.3
86
547
29.0
250 × 125
2.00
5.1
108
550
45.3
300 × 150
2.00
7.4
129
547
65.2
380 × 190
2.00
11.8
164
550
105
400 × 200
2.00
13.1
172
547
116
450 × 225
2.00
16.6
194
549
147
500 × 250
2.00
28
275
700
181
600 × 300
2.00
40
330
700
255
800 × 400
2.00
72
440
700
453
1000 × 500
2.00
112
550
700
707
1200 × 600
2.00
162
660
700
1018
1400 × 700
2.00
220
770
700
1386
1400 × 800
1.75
208
649
516
1245
1500 × 750
2.00
253
825
700
1591
1600 × 800
2.00
288
880
700
1810
1750 × 900
1.94
340
929
657
2124
2000 × 1200
1.67
415
871
462
2414
2400 × 1200
2.00
647
1321
701
4073
2700 × 1300
2.08
818
1486
728
5154
Typical fixing arrangements
*excludes effect of fixing accessories. De�ection, (D) = ID.
Performance per metre length.
140
120
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
100 ) % ( 80 n o i t c a e 60 R
140 120 100
40
80 60
20
40 20
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
De�ection (% of ID)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
80
90
100
0 110
) % ( y g r e n E
3–4
CYLINDRICAL FENDERS Small cylindricals
0.1L (min) OD 1.5D L < 6000mm Small cylindricals (≤Ø600mm) are often suspended from chains connected to brackets or U-anchors on the quay wall.
OD
ID
Chain
Shackle
100
50
14
16
125
65
14
16
150
75
16
16
175
75
16
16
200
90
18
19
200
100
18
19
250
125
20
22
300
150
24
28
380
190
28
35
400
200
28
35
450
225
28
35
500
250
32
38
600
300
35
44 [ Units: mm ]
Large cylindricals OD
OD ID
øB
L Large cylindricals (Ø900–Ø1600mm) often use a central support bar connected at each end to chains which go back to brackets or U-anchors on the quay wall.
ID
L
ØB
Chain Shackle
1000
35
24
28
1500
45
28
35
800 400 2000
55
32
38
2500
65
34
44
3000
70
40
50
1000
45
28
35
1500
55
32
38
1000 500 2000
65
38
44
2500
75
40
50
3000
85
44
50
1000
50
28
35
1500
65
34
44
1200 600 2000
75
40
50
2500
85
44
50
3000 100
50
56
1000
65
38
44
1500
70
38
44
1400 800 2000
80
44
50
2500
90
48
56
3000 100
52
64
1000
75
40
50
1500
80
40
50
1600 800 2000
90
46
50
2500 110
48
56
3000 120
54
64
[ Units: mm ]
Very large cylindricals (≥Ø1600mm) may require special ladder brackets due to their weight. These are specially designed for each application.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–5
CYLINDRICAL FENDERS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–6
EXTRUDED FENDERS Extruded fenders are simple rubber profiles, usually attached with bolts to the structure. Extrusions can be made in virtually any length then cut and drilled to suit each application. Pre-curved sections and special sizes are available on request. Usually black in colour, extruded fenders can also be supplied in creamy white as an option.
Applications Jetties and wharves for small craft Tugs and workboats Pontoon protection Inland waterways General purpose fendering
Fender E size (kNm)
R (kN)
E (kNm)
R (kN)
DC-fenders Flat bar
Bolt size
Weight
90–130 200–300
50 × 6
M12
10.1
12
110–150 250–350
60 × 8
M16
20.6
45
15
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
38.5
30
50
20
140–200 350–450 100 × 10
M24
59.0
125
30
60
25
140–200 350–450 110 × 12
M24
83.7
350
150
35
70
25
140–200 350–450 120 × 12
M30
113
400
400
175
35
80
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
146
400
400
200
35
80
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
137
500
500
250
35
100
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M36
214
A
B
100
100
150
øC
øD
E
F
30
15
25
10
150
65
20
30
200
200
75
25
250
250
100
300
300
350
G
H
[ Units: mm, kg/m ]
SC-fenders
100
1.9
157
2.7
157
150
4.2
235
6.4
235
A
B
200
7.5
314
11.3
314
100
100
150 165
150 125
øC
øD
E
F
30
15
25
10
65 65
20 20
30 30
12 15
Flat bar
Bolt size
Weight
90–130 200–300
50 × 6
M12
11.4
110–150 250–350 110–150 250–350
60 × 8 60 × 8
M16 M16
23.6 21.3
G
H
250
11.7
392
17.7
392
300
16.9
471
25.5
471
200
200
75
25
45
15
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
43.8
350
22.9
549
34.3
589
200
200
100
25
40
15
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
39.5
400
29.4
628
45.1
628
250
200
80
30
45
20
140–200 350–450
90 × 10
M24
55.3
250
250
100
30
50
20
140–200 350–450 100 × 10
M24
67.2
300 300
250 300
100 125
30 30
50 60
25 25
140–200 350–450 100 × 10 140–200 350–450 110 × 12
M24 M24
82.6 95.6
350
350
150
35
65
25
140–200 350–450 120 × 12
M30
126
350
350
175
35
65
25
140–200 350–450 120 × 12
M30
121
400
400
200
35
70
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
158
500
500
250
45
90
40
150–230 400–500 150 × 20
M36
247
500
46.0
785
70.5
785
Values are per metre.
120 Rated Reaction
) 100 d e t a R 80 f o % ( 60 n o i t 40 c a e R 20
120 100 80 60 40 20 0
n i o c t a R e
y e r g E n
0 0
10
20
30
40
) d e t a R f o % ( y g r e n E
[ Units: mm, kg/m ]
E
B
F
G
H
H
øD øC
A
50
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–7
EXTRUDED FENDERS
DD-series A
Fender E size (kNm)
R (kN)
E (kNm)
R (kN)
B
C
D
øE
øF
80
70
45
30
30
15
100
100
50
45
30
125
125
60
60
40
150
150
75
75
200
150
100
200
200
250 250
15
90–130 200–300
40 × 5
M12
8.5
20
110–150 250–300
50 × 6
M16
13.2
40
20
110–150 250–300
60 × 8
M16
18.5
80
50
25
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
23.1
100
100
50
25
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
32.9
200
125
100
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
39.9
250
125
125
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
51.5
300
300
150
150
60
30
140–200 350–450 110 × 12
M24
74.1
350
350
175
175
75
35
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
101
380
380
190
190
75
35
140–200 350–450 140 × 15
M30
119
400
300
175
150
75
35
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
99
400
400
200
200
75
35
140–200 350–450 150 × 15
M30
132
500
500
250
250
90
45
160–230 400–500 180 × 20
M36
206
2.7
136
150
3.2
115
6.4
206
200
5.7
153
11.3
275
A
B
250
8.9
191
17.6
343
100
300
12.9
230
25.5
412
350
17.6
268
34.3
471
45.2
589
500
35.9
383
70.7
736
Values are per metre.
120 Rated Reaction
) 100 d e t a R 80 f o % ( 60 n o i t 40 c a e R 20
120 100 80 60 40 20 0
n i o c t a R e
y e r g E n
0 0
10
20
30
40
4.8
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
SD-series C
D
øE
øF
G
H
Flat bar
100
50
45
30
15
90–130
200–300
40 × 5
M12
9.9
150
150
70
65
40
20
110–150 250–300
50 × 8
M16
22.7
165
125
80
60
40
20
110–150 250–300
60 × 8
M16
20.3
200
150
90
65
50
25
130–180 300–400
70 × 10
M20
30.8
200
200
90
95
50
25
130–180 300–400
70 × 10
M20
39.8
250
200
120
95
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
49.4
250
250
120
120
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
61.1
300
250
140
115
60
30
140–200 350–450 100 × 12
M24
75.0
300
300
125
135
60
30
140–200 350–450 100 × 12
M24
92.0
400
400
200
200
75
35
140–200 350–450 150 × 15
M30
153
500
500
250
250
90
45
160–230 400–500 180 × 20
M36
239
) d e t a R f o % ( y g r e n E
Bolt size Weight
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
G 25
B D
F
50
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Bolt size Weight
M12
77
306
Flat bar
35 × 5
1.4
23.0
H
90–130 200–300
100
400
G
øE C A
H
H
3–8
COMPOSITE FENDERS Composite fenders* are composites of rubber for resilience and UHMWPE for low-friction and wear resistant properties. The two materials are bonded with a special vulcanising method which is stronger and more reliable than a mechanical joint. Composite fenders are used where the simplicity of extrusions are required but with lower shear forces.
Features Resilient rubber body Low-friction UHMW-PE face Strong molecular bond Easily drilled and cut Many standard sizes Shear deformations μ = 0.8–1.0
Applications Jetties and wharves for small craft Mooring pontoons Pile guides on �oating structures Inland waterways
μ = 0.15–0.2
* Also called Rubbylene® Rubber
E
Composite
R
E
R
100 × 100
4.0
222
80 × 80
1.6
76
200 × 200
11.5
334
100 × 100
2.2
154
250 × 250
24.3
565
120 × 120
3.0
188
300 × 300
42.0
624
150 × 150
6.0
377
Values are per metre.
[ Units: kNm, kN ]
Performance values are at bore closure.
Values are per metre.
[ Units: kNm, kN ]
Performance values are at bore closure.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–9
COMPOSITE FENDERS CF-A series A
B
100
100
150 165
CF-B series
øC*
Flat bar
Bolt size
Std Length
CF-A
CF-B
90–130
200–300
50 × 6
M12
3000
10.3
11.1
12
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
3000
21.5
27.0
15
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
3000
19.2
24.8
45
20
130–180
300–400
80 × 10
M20
3000
40.2
48.0
25
45
20
130–180
300–400
80 × 10
M20
3000
36.2
48.0
30
30
50
25
140–200
350–450
100 × 10
M24
2000
60.2
75.0
30
30
60
30
140–200
350–450
110 × 12
M24
3700
92.1
108
øD
E
F
30
20
15
25
10
150
65
20
20
30
125
65
20
20
35
200
200
75
25
25
200
200
100
25
250
250
100
300
300
125
G
* Dimension only applies to CF-A fender.
B
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
G
E
t
Weight
H
t
H
H
F
øD øC
A
CF-C series A
CF-D series
B
øC*
a
80
80
42
100
100
120
120
150
150
H
Flat bar
Bolt size
Std Length
90–130
200–300
45 × 6
M12
2000
8
90–130
200–300
45 × 6
M12
10
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
b
c
t
øD
E
F
60
40
44
10
15
25
45
74
50
56
10
15
25
62
88
60
67
12
20
30
73
110
75
83
15
20
30
12
6
G
* Dimension only applies to CF-C fender.
B E
CF-C
CF-D
5.4
7.0
2000
8.4
11.0
2000
12.2
15.8
3000
19.7
24.8
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
G t
Weight
H
H
F
øD øC
a A
b c
Composite fenders are supplied undrilled. Drilled and counterbored holes, special cuts, etc are available on special request.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–10
FENDER BARS Fender Bars are available in three different versions:
ML-type for exposed locations MLS-type for low reaction Delta PU for visibility and non-marking
All Fender Bars can resist high impacts and are suitable for a wide range of general purpose applications.
ML Fender Bars The ML Fender Bar are intended for heavy duty applications – everything from ferry berths to bumpers on barges. The vulcanised internal steel plate provides very strong fixing points and reduces bending moments in the bolts.
MLS Fender Bars MLS Fender Bars have a special modified profile to reduce reaction forces and allow a high degree of �exibility in all directions. Being softer, MLS Fender Bars are ideal for protecting smaller workboats, pontoons and load-sensitive structures.
Delta PU Bars The Delta PU Bar meets the challenges of berthing light craft with aluminium or GRP hulls by combining high performance and low friction properties in a competitively priced unit. Available in highly visible, nonmarking colours, the Delta PU Bar can also improve safety or identify berths and danger areas.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–11
FENDER BARS Dimensions
Performance
Type
W
H
L
A
B
Anchors
ML
150
150
1000
250
500
2 × M24
ML
150
150
1500
250
500
3 × M24
ML
150
200
1000
250
500
ML
150
200
1500
250
ML
200
200
1000
ML
200
200
ML
200
250
ML
200
ML
200
Weight
E
R
38
16.7
638
56
24.5
961
2 × M24
43
16.7
441
500
3 × M24
65
24.5
667
250
500
2 × M30
65
26.5
824
1500
250
500
3 × M30
98
40.2
1236
1000
250
500
2 × M30
77
26.5
657
250
1500
250
500
3 × M30
116
40.2
991
300
1000
250
500
2 × M30
88
26.5
530
ML
200
300
1500
250
500
3 × M30
132
40.2
795
MLS
200
300
1000
250
500
2 × M30
63
23.0
355
MLS
200
300
1500
250
500
3 × M30
95
38.0
593
DPU
140/80
100
1000
50
450
3 × M12
9.5
--
--
Please ask for other dimensions
[ Units: mm, kg ]
[ Units: kNm, kN ]
L H
A
B
B
A
W
ML/MLS 20
L A
H
W
B
B
A
C
DPU
40
125
Strong Fixings Fender Bars have a low-profile fixing which prevents bending of the bolt even under large de�ections and shear. With timber fenders the bolts easily bend and the wood cracks and splinters.
100 Reaction Energy ) % ( n o i t c a e R
ML MLS
75
150 45
50
100
25
50
) % ( y g r e n E
150 0
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
De�ection (%)
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–12
MARINE PROTECTION PLATE (MPP) Marine Protection Plates (MPP) are resilient bumpers designed for quays where small vessels are moored, protecting both the quay face and vessel from abrasion. MPP fenders have also been used at the push knee on some tugs. MPP are ideal for applications where the distance between the boat and dock must be minimised. The design includes a heavy- duty steel back plate which is vulcanised into the rubber body so only a few fixing bolts are required. MPP are available with a �at or wave-patterned surface design.
Type
T
MPP
50
W
T 12 W
L
600
600 500
MPP
75
100
600
1500
MPP
125
1000
100 100 1000
1500
600 500
150
600 750
300 450 300
150
450 300
150
450
100 1000
750 MPP
450
100
500 150
300
100
750 MPP
450
150
500
600
300
150
750
500 125
450
100 1500
750 MPP
300
150 100
600
450
150
500
600
300
150
100
500 100
450
100
750 MPP
150
750 600
300
100 1000
750 MPP
Ø25
D
100
500 75
C
100 1500
750 MPP
L
100 1000
500 50
E C
750 MPP
E
C
500 600
D
300
150
450
100 1500
300
150 100
450
Tailor-made corner elements and other dimensions available on request.
E
Ø54
Anchors
800 700
45 4 × M20
67 6 × M20
59 4 × M20
88 6 × M20
73 4 × M20
109 6 × M20
87 4 × M20
130 6 × M20
100 4 × M20
121 151
650 600
156 195
800 700
104 130
650 600
131 164
800 700
88 109
650 600
106 132
800 700
71 88
650 600
80 100
800 700
54 67
650 600
Weight
151 6 × M20
181 227
[ Units: mm, kg ]
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–13
RAMP AND COPE PROTECTORS Ramp and Cope Protectors are special wedge-shaped rubber elements which are fitted together to form a �exible extension to steel and concrete structures. Their internal steel plate gives a strong connection and the grooved rubber face provides a high friction surface that prevents slipping.
Ramp Protectors Used as Ramp Protectors, they allow easy loading and unloading of vehicles and trailers whilst protecting the front edge of the ramp from wear. Noise levels are also much lower compared to steel ramps. Ramp Protectors weigh much less than steel too – so they are easier to install and place less stress on the structure.
20
900
162
312
RCP-1000 shown. Other dimensions are available on request. 500 260
Cope Protectors Used as Cope Protectors, the elements form a �exible extension to the cope or top edge of the quay. This reduces the gap between quay face and ship where loose or bulk cargoes can fall into the harbour. Cope Protectors are also �exible, so will bend out of the way if hit by a ship during berthing.
200
Reduced gap to berthing line 1000
Due to their �exibility, Cope Protectors are not designed to support the weight of people, vehicles, etc.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1000
Vehicle
3–14
SHEAR FENDERS Shear Fenders are unique because they have a linear load-de�ection characteristic in shear but remain stiff in compression to support heavy loads. Their simple concept makes Shear Fenders easy to install and ideal for low energy applications. The top and bottom steel plates are fully encased in rubber which protects them from corrosion and minimises maintenance. Piles and simple frontal panels are often used in conjunction with Shear Fenders. Movement in shear should be limited by chains or other mechanical stops to prevent overload.
Features Linear reaction curve Omnidirectional Supports large weights
Applications General cargo berths Ferry terminals Offshore boat landings Bridge protection Pontoon yokes Type-SF
Type-E46
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
3–15
SHEAR FENDERS Type-SF Shear Fender Fender
A
B
E
F
G
H
J
T
ØS
Bolt
Weight
SF 400-180
525
525
–
405
405
180
136
22
400
M24
115
SF 500-260
700
550
80
430
440
260
190
35
500
M30
190
SF 500-275
610
610
–
510
510
275
231
22
500
M24
183
[ Units: mm, kg ]
Shear
E
Compression
F
E
F
H
Fender DS
ES
RS
DC
EC
RC
SF 400-180
136
10.0
147
20
1.2
118
SF 500-260
190
23.8
250
29
3.8
265
SF 500-275
231
24.9
216
35
4.5
255
ØS
B
G
ØS
B
G
A
A
T J T
[ Units: mm, kNm, k N ]
Type-E46 Shear Fender Fender
W
H
L
A
B
C
ØD
E
Bolt
Weight
E46498
305
352
489
21
127
430
127
310
22
77
E46502
406
471
641
24
178
575
178
423
25
136 [ Units: mm, kg ]
W
B Fender
Shear
øD
Compression
DS
ES
RS
DC
EC
RC
E46498
484
14.0
57.9
155
2.5
61.8
E46502
660
32.7
99.1
212
6.2
116
C
L
[ Units: mm, kNm, k N ]
E 120
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
100 ) 80 % ( n o i t 60 c a e R 40
120 100
80
20
40
0
0 0
20
40
60
80
100
Shear De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S03-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
) % ( y g r e n E
A
Pneumatic and Rolling Fenders
Pneumatic Hydropneumatic Wheel Fenders Roller Fenders Cushion Rollers
Section 4
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S04-V1.1-EN
4–2
PNEUMATIC FENDERS Pneumatic fenders are ideal for permanent and semi-permanent port applications and for offshore ship-to-ship transfers. They are supplied in a wide range of sizes and in standard or high-pressure versions. Smaller fenders can be supplied as Hook type. Larger fenders are commonly fitted with a chain-tyre net (CTN) for added protection. For navy ships, a grey body is also available.
Features Easy and fast to deploy Very low reaction and hull pressure Suitable for small and large tidal ranges Maintains large clearances between hull and structure
Applications Oil and gas tankers Fast ferries and aluminium vessels Temporary and permanent installations Rapid response and emergencies
1
2
3
4
1
Abrasion-resistant rubber skin
3
Airtight rubber layer
2
Multi-layer reinforcement
4
In�ation valve
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
4–3
PNEUMATIC FENDERS Fender body Chain net (kg) (kg)
Size
Total (kg)
Chain (mm)
300 × 500
10
–
10
10
300 × 600
15
–
15
10
500 × 800
25
–
25
13
500 × 1000
35
–
35
13
800 × 1200
75
100
175
16
800 × 1500
95
110
205
16
1000 × 1500
140
170
310
16
1000 × 2000
170
200
370
16
1200 × 1800
180
210
390
18
1200 × 2000
200
220
420
18
1350 × 2500
270
260
530
20
1500 × 2500
300
400
700
22
1500 × 3000
350
440
790
22
2000 × 3000
550
880
1430
26
2000 × 3500
650
920
1570
28
2000 × 6000
950
1120
2170
32
2500 × 4000
P
1100
1510
2610
32
2500 × 5500
P
1350
1620
2970
36
3000 × 5000
P
1700
2620
4320
38
3300 × 4500
P
1800
2360
4160
38
3300 × 6500
P
2250
3120
5370
44
3300 × 10500
P
2800
4050
6850
48
4500 × 7000
P
3250
5100
8350
50
4500 × 9000
P
4950
6200
11150
50
Hook type L
Chain-tyre net (CTN) type L
P = Pressure Relief Valve fitted as st andard.
Installation dimensions Pneumatic fenders must be installed onto a solid struct ure or reaction panel to ensure
a
c b
HHWL
that they are properly supported during impacts.
d Size
a
b
c
d
e
1000 × 1500
975
950
1350
200
375
2000
1200 × 2000
1200
1140
1620
220
430
2600
1500 × 2500
1525
1420
2050
250
525
3250
2000 × 3500
2050
1900
2700
300
650
4500
2500 × 4000
2490
2380
3380
450
890
5200
3300 × 6500
3380
3140
4460
500
1080
8500 [ Units: mm ]
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
tidal range
w
LLWL e
w
4–4
PNEUMATIC FENDERS 0.5kgf/cm2 (7.1psi)
Initial Pressure Energy (kNm)
Size
0.8kgf/cm2 (11.4psi)
Reaction (kN)
Pressure (kN/m2)
Energy (kNm)
Reaction (kN)
Pressure (kN/m2)
300 × 500
1.3
22.6
189
1.7
29.4
246
300 × 600
1.5
26.5
180
2.0
35.3
239
500 × 800
5.7
58.9
187
7.4
78.5
249
500 × 1000
7.2
73.6
179
9.1
98.1
239
800 × 1200
21.6
141
188
28.1
187
250
800 × 1500
27.5
186
191
35.1
235
241
1000 × 1500
40.2
222
190
52.7
281
240
1000 × 2000
54.0
295
180
70.2
374
228
1200 × 1800
69.7
320
190
91.0
404
240
1200 × 2000
77.5
354
185
101
449
235
1350 × 2500
125
496
181
175
650
238
1500 × 2500
152
554
186
196
697
234
1500 × 3000
182
658
178
235
837
227
2000 × 3000
324
883
189
422
1122
240
2000 × 3500
378
1030
183
491
1315
234
2000 × 6000
647
1766
171
843
2246
217
2500 × 4000
675
1481
188
872
1864
236
2500 × 5500
928
2037
178
1197
2560
224
3000 × 5000
1226
2207
185
1570
2786
233
3300 × 4500
1324
2197
194
1712
2764
244
3300 × 6500
1913
3169
181
2472
3993
228
3300 × 10600
3090
5121
171
4297
6612
220
4500 × 7000
3816
4660
186
4944
5866
234
4500 × 9000
4954
6004
152
6357
7544
191
140
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
120
100 ) % ( 80 n o i t c a e 60 R
140 120 100
40
80 ) 60
20
40
% ( y g r e n E
20 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55 55
60
0 65
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
4–5
HYDROPNEUMATIC FENDERS Submarines and other vessels which contact fenders below waterline require a unique solution. Hydropneumatic fenders are specially adapted to this application. The fender body is partially water-filled, then pressurised with air and ballasted to make it stand vertically. Fender draft and performance can be tuned by altering the water:air ratio and in�ation pressure.
Features Sub-surface contact face Very low hull pressures Variable draft Prevents acoustic tile damage
D
Sea Level Air
Applications Submarines Some fast ferries Semi-submersible oil rigs
Length Water
Due to the very specialist nature of Hydro-pneumatic fenders, it is strongly advised that a detailed study be carried out for each case. Please ask for assistance with this.
W
Ballast Weight
Initial Pressure 0.5bar (7.1psi)
Fender Diameter (mm)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Length (mm)
1700
7200
2000
6000
2500
5500
3300
6500
3300
10500
Water (%)
D (%)
Energy (kNm)
Reaction (kN)
65
45
134
611
0
60
592
1813
65
45
155
599
0
60
647
1766
65
45
223
687
0
60
928
2037
60
45
616
1247
0
60
1913
3169
55
45
589
1275
0
60
3120
5170
4–6
WHEEL FENDERS Wheel fenders are widely used on exposed corners to help ships manoeuvre into berths and narrow channels such as locks and dry-dock entrances. The main axle slides on bearings and the wheel reacts against back rollers to provide high energy and minimal rolling resistance, whilst the stainless steel and composite Trelleborg Orkot® bearings are almost zero maintenance.
Features Highest energy absorption Very low rolling resistance Use singly or in multiple stacks Composite and stainless steel bearings Low maintenance casing design
Applications Dry-dock entrances and walls Lock approaches Exposed corners
protective eyebrow K
B
L
de�ection E
�ared hull
K
B
L
�ared hull E small ship L
K
B
L
ship at high water E
HHWL
E ship at low water LLWL
E
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
4–7
WHEEL FENDERS The table indicates typical wheel fender casing dimensions. For special applications and unusual corners, the casing shape can be altered for a perfect fit. Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for details. Fender
H
J
K
L
α
450
460
650
50
150
0–40°
350
550
510
850
50
200
0–40°
1150
550
700
690
950
50
200
0–40°
1980
1250
500
800
760
1250
50
250
0–45°
3200
2550
1600
850
1000
970
1350
50
250
0–45°
3750
2900
1700
1000
1250
900
1500
50
250
0–45°
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
110-45WF
1700
1000
1450
1080
900
350
130-50WF
2000
1200
1750
1300
1000
175-70WF
2650
1500
2200
1750
200-75WF
2750
1750
2550
250-100WF
3350
2200
290-110WF
4200
2500
[ Units: mm ]
A
Ship Direction
n o i t c e r i D p i h S
F = α
=
B
J
=
C
= On the 90° corner of a jetty for warping
De�ection d
n o i t c e r i D p i h S
øD
0–30
E
On an angled knuckle corner for alignment
n o i t c e r i D p i h S
Gate Gate
At the 90° entrance of a lock or dry dock
Within the body of a lock or dry dock
120 Fender
100 ) % ( 80 n o i t c 60 a e R
120 100 80 60 40 20 0
40 20 0 0
20
40 60 80 De�ection (% of d)
) % ( y g r e n E
Reaction (kN)
De�ection (mm)
Pressure (bar)
110-45WF
33
150
400
5.5
130-50WF
61
220
500
3.5
175-70WF
100
315
600
4.8
200-75WF
220
590
700
5.5
250-100WF
440
920
925
5.5
290-110WF
880
1300
1200
5.8
100
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Energy (kNm)
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
4–8
ROLLER FENDERS Roller Fenders are usually installed to guide ships in restricted spaces like walls of dry docks. They can also be used on corners and lock entrances where lower energies are needed. Roller Fenders use stainless steel and composite Trelleborg Orkot® bearings which give a very low rolling resistance and require virtually zero maintenance.
Features Good energy absorption Gentle contact face Low rolling resistance Use singly or in multiple stacks Composite and stainless steel bearings Low maintenance frame design
Applications Dry-dock entrances and walls Lock approaches Some exposed corners and entrances
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
4–9
ROLLER FENDERS The table indicates typical roller fender frame dimensions. For special applications and unusual corners, the frame shape can be altered for a perfect fit. Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for details. Fender
A
B
110-45RF
1250
1150
130-50RF
1530
140-60RF
C
D
E
G
H
J
K
L
Anchor
610
1080
1150
220
460
800
340
60
6 × M30
1400
740
1320
1450
260
510
950
400
75
6 × M30
1600
1450
765
1370
1500
270
610
1000
425
75
6 × M30
175-70RF
2050
1850
975
1750
1900
350
690
1250
500
125
6 × M36
200-75RF
2300
2100
1110
1980
2100
400
765
1400
550
150
6 × M42
250-100RF
3000
2700
1425
2550
2700
500
895
1800
700
200
6 × M48 [ Units: mm ]
A E
n o i t c e r i D p i h S
Ship Direction
=
=
C =
=
B On the 90° corner of a jetty for warping
G
De�ection
On an angled knuckle corner for alignment
d n o i t c e r i D p i h S
øD L
n o i t c e r i D p i h S
0–30
K H
J
K
Gate Gate At the 90° entrance of a lock or dry dock
L
Within the body of a lock or dry dock
120 Fender
100 ) % ( 80 n o i t c 60 a e R
120 100 80 60 40 20 0
40 20 0 0
20
40 60 80 De�ection (% of d)
) % ( y g r e n E
Reaction (kN)
De�ection (mm)
Pressure (bar)
110-45RF
13
175
152
5.5
130-50RF
22
200
230
3.5
140-60RF
20
210
205
3.5
175-70RF
37
345
225
4.8
200-75RF
100
765
270
5.5
250-100RF
170
1000
345
5.5
100
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Energy (kNm)
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
4–10
CUSHION ROLLERS Cushion Rollers are used to guide pontoons and �oating structures quietly and gently up and down their guide piles. The resilient wheel can be supplemented by a rubber cushion pad to withstand berthing impacts. Stainless steel and plastic bearings require minimal maintenance.
Features Extremely quiet Resilient wheel and cushion Withstands berthing impacts Gentle on protective coatings Low maintenance bearings
Guide pile
Applications Pontoon guides Other �oating structures
Pontoon
Roller
Cushion
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
4–11
CUSHION ROLLERS The table indicates typical Cushion Roller dimensions. For special applications, the shape can be altered for a perfect fit. Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for details. Fender
Capacity
A
B
C
D
T
W
a1
a2
a3
b1
b2
Fixings
CR10
10t
450
450
542
370
130
125
90
310
–
35
380
4 × M20
CR15
15t
450
450
542
370
130
190
90
175
135
35
380
6 × M20
CR20
20t
450
520
546
370
130
250
90
175
135
70
380
6 × M24
[ Units: mm ]
2
6
5
1
Rubber roller
2
Rubber cushion pad
3
Roller frame
4
Axle and bearings
5
Roller fixings
6
Cushion fixings
3 4 1
W
B b1
b2
C b1
D
T a1
a3 a2 A a2 a3 a1
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S04-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Foam Fenders and Buoys
SeaGuard SeaCushion Donut SeaFloat
Section 5
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S05-V1.1-EN
5–2
FOAM FENDER AND
Trelleborg Foam Fenders, Donuts and Buoys all share the same construction technology centred on a closed-cell polyethylene foam core and an outer skin of reinforced polyurethane elastomer. The foam absorbs the impacts whilst the skin resists wear and tear in an aggressive environment.
M1100-S05-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–3
BUOY TECHNOLOGY
High energy, low reaction Core foam comes in many different types. Lower density foams are softer and generate lower reaction forces. Higher density foams are stiffer and can absorb more impact energy. The micro-cell structure of the foam contains millions of tiny air bubbles. These reach an equilibrium after a few compression cycles – one reason why the performance of all foam fenders should be rated after at least three full de�ections.
Strong reinforcement Skin and reinforcement are applied simultaneously – a method pioneered by and unique to Trelleborg. Nylon filaments are individually applied at the optimum angle. Multiple homogeneous layers increase strength, and additional reinforcement is applied to both ends where stresses are highest. This system gives a final strength impossible to match with fabric layering methods.
Unsinkable The closed cell foam structure makes punctures a thing of the past. Every cell is separate and so water cannot migrate into the foam. Even after many years active service, the foam core can be returned to the factory, re-skinned and made ready for a new lease of life.
Wear resistant The polyurethane elastomer is spray applied. This creates a high quality and homogeneous skin matrix combining extreme wear resistance with non-marking properties and the option of high visibility colours.
M1100-S05-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Safety first Now matter how badly abused, Trelleborg Foam Fenders, Donuts and Buoys will not burst or explode. Damage is rare, but if the worst should happen there is the comfort that Trelleborg fenders and buoys will still function until repairs are possible.
5–4
SEA GUARD® SeaGuard fenders can be deployed �oated or suspended, against a quay wall or for ship-to-ship operations. SeaGuard fenders suit all sites with small or large tidal changes. They also work just as well on new or old structures. Hull pressures are very low, making SeaGuard fenders gentle on soft-skinned ships. The skin is very tough but also non-marking, even against white-hulled yachts and cruise liners. Low maintenance comes as standard because the polyurethane elastomer is highly resistant to the effects of ozone and ultra violet light. SeaGuard fenders will never sink or de�ate. Even at the end of their first service life they can be returned to the factory for refurbishment before going back to work.
L t
Features Fully compliant with US Navy specifications Wide range of standard and custom sizes Low reaction and high energy options Operate �oating or suspended Virtually indestructible No chain/tyre net required Non-marking even against white hulls Unsinkable design
Applications Cruise ships Container vessels Bulk cargo RoRo and ferries Oil and gas tankers General cargo Navy berths Ship-to-ship transfers
D
Swivel
LF Beaded and integrated end terminals
Closed cell foam core
Internal chains
Reinforcement
Fixings
Polyurethane skin
Serial number
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–5
SEA GUARD®
Polyethylene foam core Property
Unit
Density 1
kg/m�
64 ± 6
Tensile strength 1
kN/m�
>414
%
>140
kN/m�
>140
kg/m�
<1
Elongation at break 1 Compressive strength (50%) 1 Water absorption
1
Working temperature
2
Typical result
ºC
–30 to +70
Unit
Typical result
Reinforcement filament Property
Hardness
3
Tensile strength (PU only) 4 Elongation at break (PU only) 4 Tear strength 4 Flexural life (Ross)
5
Abrasion resistance
6
Shore A
75–95
MPa
>13.8
%
>300
kN/m
>32
cycles
>10000
NBS
>100
Property
Unit
Typical result
Material
–
2520 denier nylon
Tensile strength (single filament)
N
230
Elongation at break
%
16
Polyurethane elastomer
Helix angle
degrees
Filament spacing
45–60
mm
Standards 1
ASTM D-3575
4
ASTM D-412
2
PPC-C-1752B
5
ASTM D-1052
ASTM D-2240
6
ASTM D-1630
3
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
<4
5–6
SEA GUARD® 120 Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. 100 d 80 ) % ( n60 o i t c a e R
R
120 100 80 )
40
% (
60 y g
r e E
40 n
20
20 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60 60
0 65
De�ection (%)
For increased energy use High, Extra High or Super High capacity foam grades. For reduced hull pressure use Low Reaction foam grade.
1.6 1.54
LR & STD HC
1.5 1.45
Foam grades
E
Ratio
Low Reaction
LR
0.6
Standard
STD
1.0
High Capacity
HC
1.3
Extra High Capacity
EHC
1.9
Super High Capacity
SHC
2.6
Calculation example
EHC SHC
1.4
) e l c y c d r 1.3 3 o t e v i t 1.2 a l e r ( r o1.1 t c a f n o i t 1.0 c e r r o C
0.9
Determine the 1st cycle performance for SeaGuard 2000 × 4000 (LR) E3-STD = 3rd cycle energy for STD grade = 540kNm R3-STD = 3rd cycle reaction for STD grade = 1005kN P3-STD = 3rd cycle hull pressure for STD grade = 172kN/m �
0.8
0.7
1
2
3
4 5 6 7 89 10
50
100
Compression cycle
F R = Foam Ratio for LR grade = 0.6 N1 = 1st cycle compression ratio = 1.3 E1-LR = 1st cycle energy for LR grade = E 3-STD × F R × N1 = 540 × 0.6 × 1.3 = 421kNm R1-LR = 1st cycle reaction for L R grade = R3-STD × F R × N1 = 1005 × 0.6 × 1.3 = 784kN P1-LR = 1st cycle reaction for LR grade = P3-STD × F R × N1 = 172 × 0.6 × 1.3 = 134.6kN/m�
Caution Fender selection should not be based on 1st cycle performance. Always use ≥3rd cycle performance depending on application, required safety factors and other parameters.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–7
SEA GUARD® Performance at 60% de�ection, STD Grade, 3rd cycle Diameter × Length
Energy
Reaction
Pressure
Energy
Reaction
Pressure
(mm)
(ft)
(kNm)
(kN)
(kN/m�)
(ft-kip)
(kip)
(ksf)
700 × 1500 1000 × 1500 1000 × 2000 1200 × 2000 1350 × 2500 1500 × 3000 1700 × 3000 2000 × 3500 2000 × 4000 2000 × 4500 2500 × 4000 2500 × 5500 3000 × 4900 3000 × 6000 3300 × 4500 3300 × 6500
2.3 × 4.9 3.3 × 4.9 3.3 × 6.5 3.9 × 6.5 4.4 × 8.2 4.9 × 9.8 5.6 × 9.8 6.5 × 11.5 6.5 × 13.1 6.5 × 14.7 8.2 × 13.1 8.2 × 18.0 9.8 × 16.0 9.8 × 19.7 10.8 × 14.7 10.8 × 21.3
26 47 68 91 152 232 282 454 540 624 801 1200 1430 1851 1498 2421
133 173 254 280 418 578 618 845 1005 1161 1197 1788 1775 2295 1690 2731
172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172
19 35 50 67 112 171 208 335 398 460 591 885 1055 1365 1105 1786
30 39 57 63 94 130 139 190 226 261 269 402 399 516 380 614
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
Diameter × Length
Energy
Reaction
Pressure
Energy
Reaction
Pressure
(ft)
(mm)
(kNm)
(kN)
(kN/m�)
(ft-kip)
(kip)
(ksf)
2×4 2×6 2×8 3×6 3×8 3 × 10 4×6 4×8 4 × 10 4 × 12 5×8 5 × 10 5 × 12 5 × 14 6 × 12 6 × 16 6 × 20 7 × 14 7 × 16 7 × 20 8 × 14 8 × 16 8 × 20 9 × 18 9 × 22 10 × 16 10 × 18 10 × 20 10 × 22 11 × 18 11 × 22 12 × 24 13 × 26 14 × 28
610 × 1220 610 × 1830 610 × 2440 910 × 1830 910 × 2440 910 × 3050 1220 × 1830 1220 × 2440 1220 × 3050 1220 × 3660 1520 × 2440 1520 × 3050 1520 × 3660 1520 × 4270 1830 × 3660 1830 × 4880 1830 × 6100 2130 × 4270 2130 × 4880 2130 × 6100 2440 × 4270 2440 × 4880 2440 × 6100 2740 × 5490 2740 × 6710 3050 × 4880 3050 × 5490 3050 × 6100 3050 × 6710 3350 × 5490 3350 × 6710 3660 × 7320 3960 × 7920 4270 × 8530
15 24 34 53 75 96 81 121 160 198 183 244 305 365 407 579 751 660 778 1013 839 994 1303 1399 1787 1466 1706 1946 2186 2009 2590 3518 4393 5423
89 147 209 214 302 391 249 369 494 605 445 596 743 890 827 1179 1530 1152 1357 1766 1281 1517 1988 1899 2424 1788 2082 2375 2669 2229 2874 3781 4381 5026
172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 148 172 172 172 172
11 18 25 39 55 71 60 89 118 146 135 180 225 269 300 427 554 487 574 747 619 733 961 1032 1318 1081 1258 1435 1612 1482 1910 2595 3240 4000
20 33 47 48 68 88 56 83 111 136 100 134 167 200 186 265 344 259 305 397 288 341 447 427 545 402 468 534 600 501 646 850 985 1130
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.1 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
Performances and weights apply to STD Grade foam.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Weight (kg)
(lb)
109 147 200 299 426 653 748 1161 1397 1571 1925 3059 3295 4370 3531 5485
240 325 440 660 940 1440 1650 2560 3080 3465 4245 6745 7265 9635 7785 12095
Weight (kg)
86 118 150 168 254 331 283 374 476 658 476 680 816 1134 1122 1701 2426 1678 1995 2857 2132 2449 3447 3288 4762 3370 3839 4535 5351 4512 5805 7324 9116 10884
(lb)
190 260 330 370 560 730 625 825 1050 1450 1050 1500 1800 2500 2475 3750 5350 3700 4400 6300 4700 5400 7600 7250 10500 7430 8465 10000 11800 9950 12800 16150 20100 24000
5–8
SEA GUARD® Angular compression factors 100
100 α
= 35°
de�ection
80
θ
80
α α
) % ( V60 F A – r o t c a F40 y g r e n E
= 15°
θ = 5°
) % ( L60 F A – r o t c a F40 y g r e n E
= 0°
α
20
θ = 0° de�ection
θ = 15°
20
0
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0
10
20
De�ection (%)
30
40
50
60
De�ection (%)
Mooring applications
Mounting area D
HW 0.8–1.0D LW 0.5–0.7D
Floating or suspended
0.3–0.4D
HW
LW
Supporting structures must be large enough to cope with tides and the fender footprint when compressed. Guide rail
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–9
SEA GUARD® Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–10
SEA CUSHION® SeaCushion fenders are designed for hard work. The superior grade of foam core, an extra tough skin plus chain-tyre net make SeaCushions the most rugged �oating fender on the market. This means SeaCushions are perfect for the most demanding applications: open water ship-to-ship operations, offshore structures or anywhere needing absolute fender reliability. Whatever else happens, SeaCushion will not de�ate, burst or sink. Efficiency is excellent too. For the same energy, SeaCushion fenders have lower reactions than pneumatic types. Hull pressures are very low too at just 172kN/m� for STD-grades (even less for LR-grades) – well within PIANC guidelines for LNG vessels.
Features Ultra-tough, unsinkable design Wide range of standard and custom sizes Low reaction and high energy options Low hull pressures Maintains safe stand-off distances Low maintenance Well proven design
Applications LNG and oil terminals Ship-to-ship operations Offshore boat landings Shipyards Military applications
L
Overall Diameter
D
Unsinkable foam core
Chain-tyre net
Filament reinforcement matrix
Various mooring options
Tough polyurethane skin
Unique serial number
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–11
SEA CUSHION® Performance at 60% de�ection, STD Grade, 3rd cycle Diameter × Length
Overall Diameter
Energy
(ft)
(mm)
(ft)
(mm)
(kNm)
3’ × 6’ 4’ × 8’ 5’ × 10’ 6’ × 12’ 7’ × 14’ 8’ × 12’ 8’ × 16’ 9’ × 18’ 10’ × 16’ 10’ × 20’ 11’ × 22’ 12’ × 24’ 13’ × 26’ 14’ × 28’
915 × 1830 1220 × 2440 1525 × 3050 1830 × 3660 2135 × 4270 2440 × 3660 2440 × 4875 2745 × 5490 3050 × 4875 3050 × 6100 3350 × 6700 3660 × 7320 3960 × 7920 4270 × 8535
4.9 5.9 7.3 8.3 9.3 10.3 10.3 11.3 12.3 12.3 13.3 14.3 15.3 16.3
1500 1800 2200 2500 2800 3100 3100 3400 3700 3700 4100 4400 4700 5000
49 115 222 382 603 630 896 1270 1323 1735 2301 2977 3775 4581
Overall Diameter
Energy
Diameter × Length
Reaction Pressure
Energy
(kN)
(kN/m 2)
(ft-kip)
(kip)
(ksf)
249 436 676 965 1308 1192 1695 2135 2002 2624 3163 3754 4390 5018
172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172
36 85 164 282 445 465 661 937 976 1280 1697 2196 2784 3379
56 98 152 217 294 268 381 480 450 590 711 844 987 1128
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
Reaction Pressure
(mm)
(ft)
(ft)
(mm)
(kNm)
(kN)
(kN/m�)
1000 × 2000 1200 × 2000 1350 × 2500 1500 × 3000 1700 × 3000 2000 × 3500 2000 × 4000 2200 × 4500 2500 × 4000 2500 × 5500 3000 × 6000 3300 × 4500 3300 × 6500 4200 × 8400
3.3’ × 6.6’ 3.9’ × 6.6’ 4.4’ × 8.2’ 4.9’ × 9.8’ 5.6’ × 9.8’ 6.6’ × 11.5’ 6.6’ × 13.1’ 7.2’ × 14.8’ 8.2’ × 13.1’ 8.2’ × 18.0’ 9.8’ × 19.7’ 10.8’ × 14.8’ 10.8’ × 21.3’ 13.8’ × 27.6’
5.2 5.8 6.3 7.2 7.9 8.9 8.9 9.5 10.5 10.5 12.1 13.1 13.1 16.1
1600 1800 1900 2200 2400 2700 2700 2900 3200 3200 3700 4000 4000 4900
65 87 140 210 266 430 503 678 733 1075 1645 1365 2144 4504
298 338 485 649 721 988 1152 1428 1357 1988 2540 1913 3003 4933
172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172
Energy (ft-kip)
48 64 103 155 196 317 371 500 541 793 1213 1007 1581 3322
Reaction Pressure
Weight (kg)
687 1120 1850 2222 3157 3108 4285 5989 5360 6893 8391 12298 14649 16538
Reaction Pressure (kip)
67 76 109 146 162 222 259 321 305 447 571 430 675 1109
(ksf)
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
(lb)
1515 2470 4080 4900 6961 6853 9448 13206 11819 15200 18503 27118 32300 36466
Weight (kg)
741 956 1197 1810 1995 2346 2566 3341 3371 4684 6808 5521 8073 16330
(lb)
1634 2108 2639 3992 4399 5173 5658 7367 7433 10329 15012 12174 17800 36008
Performances and weights apply to STD Grade foam.
120
For increased energy use High, Extra High or Super High capacity foam grades. For reduced hull pressure use Low Reaction foam grade.
Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. 100 d 80
) % ( n o i t 60 c a e R
R
40
Foam grades
E
Ratio
120
Low Reaction
LR
0.6
100
Standard
STD
1.0
80 )
High Capacity
HC
1.3
Extra High Capacity
EHC
1.9
Super High Capacity
SHC
2.6
% ( 60 y g r 40 e n E
20
20 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
55 60
0 65
Refer to SeaGuard (p5–6) for n th cycle performance correction factors.
5–12
SEA CUSHION® Angular compression factors 100
100 α
= 35°
de�ection
80
θ
80
α α
) % ( V60 F A – r o t c a F40 y g r e n E
= 15°
θ = 5°
) % ( L60 F A – r o t c a F40 y g r e n E
= 0°
α
20
θ = 0° de�ection
θ = 15°
20
0
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
De�ection (%)
60
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
De�ection (%)
Fender-to-fender mooring and other variations are also possible VB
Overall Diameter D
0.8–1.0D
0.3–0.4D
0.5–0.7D
Many other methods of mooring and attachment are possible. Please ask for further details.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–13
SEA CUSHION® Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–14
DONUT FENDERS Donut Fenders are an effective solution for simple berthing dolphins, guiding and turning structures. The buoyant Donut �oats up and down a single tubular pile and freely rotates to help align or redirect ships. The internal casing has long lasting, low-friction bearings which need minimal maintenance. The foam is unsinkable and cannot burst or de�ate. The Donut skin is durable polyurethane reinforced with continuous nylon filaments. Donut Fenders are custom designed for every application. They can have supplementary buoyancy to present a raised contact face. The body can be additionally protected with SeaTimber rubbing strips to cope with ferry beltings. Bright colours are often used to improve visibility and safety.
Features Freely rotates around a pile Rises and falls with water level Fast to install Requires minimal maintenance High performance Low hull pressures Will not mark ship hulls
overall diameter
draft
free rotation about centre tidal range Low-friction bearings
Options Additional buoyancy tanks to raise fender height Trim tanks to adjust and trim draft Various netting options for heavy duty applications Applications Corner protection Turning structures Lead-in jetties Simple breasting dolphins Bridge protection
Nylon reinforced polyurethane skin
seabed
Steel pile
Flexible closed-cell foam
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–15
DONUT FENDERS Dimensions and performance Donut size D
Maximum pile ØP mm
Energy*
ft
kNm
Reaction* kN
Energy† ft-kip
D ØP
Reaction†
mm
ft
1270
4.2
610
2.0
7.2
116
1.6
7.9
1450
4.8
710
2.3
9.2
131
2.1
9.0
1520
5.0
762
2.5
10.5
140
2.6
9.6
1780
5.8
914
3.0
14.1
162
3.2
11.1
1910
6.3
995
3.3
16.4
175
3.7
12.0
2030
6.7
1067
3.5
18.6
186
4.2
12.8
2210
7.3
1185
3.9
22.3
204
5.0
14.0
2290
7.5
1219
4.0
23.6
210
5.3
14.4
2490
8.2
1345
4.4
28.0
229
6.3
15.7
2540
8.3
1372
4.5
29.3
234
6.6
16.0
2790
9.2
1524
5.0
35.3
256
7.9
17.6
2970
9.8
1636
5.4
40.1
273
9.0
18.7
3050
10.0
1676
5.5
42.1
280
9.5
19.2
3300
10.8
1829
6.0
49.5
304
11.1
20.8
3450
11.3
1933
6.3
54.6
319
12.3
21.9
3530
11.6
1981
6.5
57.2
327
12.9
22.4
3810
12.5
2134
7.0
65.9
350
14.8
24.0
3960
13.0
2241
7.4
72.1
366
16.2
25.1
4060
13.3
2286
7.5
75.1
374
16.9
25.6
4220
13.8
2388
7.8
81.3
389
18.3
26.7
δF‡
kip
H
Increasing Donut height (H) will increase reaction and energy proportionately.
Performances are based on STD grade foam. Non-standard sizes available on request. Contact Trelleborg Marine Systems for more details. †
* values for H = 1000mm. ‡ all performances at
δF =
values for H = 1 foot.
60% of Donut wall thickness.
120 Nominal rated de�ection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. 100
80 ) % ( n60 o i t c a e R
120 100 80 )
40
% (
60 y g
r e E
40 n
20
20 0 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
40
45
50
55
60 60
0 65
5–16
DONUT FENDERS Applications Breasting dolphins
Corner protection
Guiding structures
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–17
DONUT FENDERS Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–18
SEAFLOAT Sea�oat® buoys are resilient surface �oats for inland waterways, navigation channels and offshore applications. Various types of SeaFloat are available, each sharing the same robust construction and high performance materials. They also offer significant advantages over conventional steel buoys. SeaFloat buoys are lighter and easier to handle. They offer better corrosion resistance. Being foam filled, SeaFloats will never sink or burst. They can even withstand collisions by passing vessels with little risk of damage.
Upper end fitting (various options available)
Resilient outer foam
Rigid inner foam
Internal steel core
Reinforced urethane elastomer skin Load distribution plates Lower end fitting (mooring eye shown)
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–19
SEAFLOAT Dimensions and performance Sea�oat buoys are usually custom designed for each application. The following examples are of typical confi gurations. For custom buoys or those not listed below, please contact Trelleborg Marine Systems.
Type
Model number
Net buoyancy (kg)
Buoy weight (kg)
Overall diameter (m)
Ht. �otation section (m)
Overall height (m)
Working load (tonne)
Support buoys
SB-400
400
150
0.9
n/a
0.9
10
SB-750
750
170
1.1
n/a
1.1
10
SB-1000
1000
290
1.2
n/a
1.2
18
SB-1500
1500
330
1.4
n/a
1.4
18
SB-2000
2000
450
1.5
n/a
1.5
18
SB-4000
4000
680
1.8
n/a
1.8
20
UF-45
45
25
0.4
n/a
0.6
2.3
UF-90
90
30
0.5
n/a
0.8
2.3
UF-140
140
40
0.5
n/a
0.8
2.3
UF-225
225
60
0.6
n/a
0.9
3.4
UF-450
450
90
0.7
n/a
1.2
4.5
UF-700
700
110
0.8
n/a
1.5
4.5
UF-900
900
200
0.9
n/a
1.5
9.1
1350
340
1.2
n/a
1.9
9.1
Utility buoys
UF-1350 Pendant buoys
PBCT-4500
4500
1000
1.7
2.5
2.5
68
PBCT-7000
7000
1300
1.9
2.8
2.7
68
PBCT-9000
9000
1700
2.1
3.1
3.0
68
PBCT-14000
14000
2300
2.4
3.6
3.2
68
PBCT-18000
18000
3000
2.6
3.9
3.4
68
PBCT-23000
23000
3900
2.8
4.1
3.6
91
MB-2250
2250
860
1.9
1.3
2.3
45
MB-5000
5000
1400
2.5
1.5
2.6
68
MB-7000
7000
1900
2.8
1.5
2.6
91
MB-9000
9000
2400
3.0
1.7
2.8
91
MB-11000
11000
2700
3.2
1.8
2.9
91
MB-14000
14000
3400
3.4
2.1
3.2
136
MB-16000
16000
3800
3.6
2.2
3.3
136
MB-18000
18000
4100
3.7
2.3
3.4
136
MB-22000
22000
4700
3.9
2.5
2.6
136
MB-34000
34000
6400
4.2
3.2
4.3
136
MB-45000
45000
8000
4.2
4.1
5.2
136
Mooring buoys
Performance may var y due to operating temperature, compression speed, material proper ties and dimensional tolerances. Please ask for more details.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–20
SEAFLOAT Built to last Reinforced elastomer skin SeaFloat buoys have a nylon filament reinforced polyurethane skin which has excellent resistance to water, oil, ice, strong sunlight and abrasive surfaces. It remains �exible even at -40°C (-40°F) making it suitable for Tropical or Arctic operations. Energy absorbing The SeaFloat buoy absorbs impact energy so colliding vessels will not damage the buoy or themselves. Unsinkable foam Only closed-cell foams are used in SeaFloat buoys. The micro-bubble matrix of the foam means it does not absorb water even if cut or damaged. This makes SeaFloat buoys impossible to sink. Permanent colours The polyurethane skin is pigmented through its entire thickness, so colours will not wear off and will never need repainting. A wide choice of bright colours can help improve safety and identification. Custom engineered Every SeaFloat is engineered to suit the application. We can advise on operating needs, load requirements and other features to suit every case.
Optional fitting End fittings A variety of SeaFloat end fittings are available. All are made of steel – either galvanised or painted to protect against corrosion.
Forged eye
Swivel eye
Padeye
Bail
Quick release hook
Pick- up Tee
Hawse Pipe
Hawse Pipe & Capture Plate
Quality SeaFloats must be reliable. We closely monitor all raw materials and manufacturing processed from start to finish for a highly dependable, long lasting product. At the end of their service lives, most buoys can be returned to the factory where they can be remanufactured ‘as good as new’.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
5–21
SEAFLOAT Proven in practice
Mooring buoy
Instrumentation buoy
Anchor pendant buoy
Hose end marker buoys
Workboat backdown buoy
Lighted mooring buoy
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S05-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Engineered Plastics
UHMW-PE Sliding Fenders Ecoboard SeaPile SeaTimber SeaCamel Section 6
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S06-V1.1-EN
6–2
UHMW-PE FACINGS Trelleborg FQ1000 ultra high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMW-PE) is the first choice material for facing steel fender panels and other heavy duty applications. It combines very low friction with excellent impact strength and a wear resistance much better than steel. Most popular is FQ1000-DS which is ‘double-sintered’ and workhardened for extra durability. The standard colour is black, but if other colours are needed then FQ1000-V ‘virgin’ grade also comes in yellow, white, grey, blue, green and red. FQ1000 UHMW-PE materials are compounded to resist ozone and UV radiation. They do not degrade or rot and are easily recycled at the end of their useful service life.
Features Very low friction coefficient Excellent abrasion resistance UV and ozone resistant Does not rot, split or crack 100% recyclable
Relative Abrasion
FQ1000V =
100
Applications Fender panel (frame) face pads Rubbing strips V-fender shields Lock entrance and wall protection Bridge buttress protection Beltings on workboats
Refer to Section 12 (Fender Design) for guidance on using UHMW-PE as a fender facing.
V 0 0 0 1 Q F
6 6 n o l y N
E P W M H
E P D H
E F 4 l T 0 e P 3 e t S S S d l i M
i k k E
t r a e h n e e r G
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–3
Property
Test Method
Unit
Typical Value
Wear allowances
FQ1000-V FQ1000-DS
Density
ISO 1183-1
g/cm�
0.94–0.95 0.95–0.96
Notched Impact Strength (Charpy)
ISO 11542-2
kJ/m�
140–170
100–130
Abrasion Index (Sand-slurry)
ISO/DIS 15527(Draft)
FQ1000V = 100 100–110
130–150
Yield Strength
ISO/R 50mm/min
N/mm�
15–20
15–20
Elongation at Break*
ISO/R 50mm/min
%
>50
>50
Dynamic Friction (PE-Steel)
Pm = 1N/mm� V=10m/min
–
0.15
0.15
Hardness
ISO 868 / DIN 53505 3s value, 6mm sample
Shore D
63
63–66
Operating Temperature
–
°C
–80 to +80 –80 to +80
Thermal Expansion
DIN 53752
K–1
≈ 2 × 10–4
W t
≈ 2 × 10–4
t
W
30
3–5
40
7–10
50
10–15
70
18–25
100
28–40
FQ1000-V is virgin gr ade material.
Small increases in facing thickness can
FQ1000- DS is double sintered (regenerated) material.
greatly extend ser vice life for minimal
All values for black, UV stabilized material.
extra cost.
Values for coloured materials will vary. * Alternative test methods such as ASTM D638 give higher values circa 350%.
Typical dimensions A
Steel panel
Open structure
B
B
B
A
Timber fixing C
t≈30–150
D
~0.3t D D C
always use oversize washers
E
A
45–80
B
250–350
C
45–80
D
300–450
E
5–10
Dimensions will depend on pad thickness and application.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–4
SLIDING FENDERS HD-PE Sliding Fenders are the ideal alternative to timber facings with the added advantage of low-friction and better wear properties. HD-PE does not split or decay and is totally resistant to borers. Environmentally friendly, HD-PE can be used instead of tropical hardwoods, lasts much longer, and can be fully recycled at the end of its useful life.
Features Low friction coefficient Resists marine borers High abrasion resistance UV and ozone resistant Does not rot, split or crack Easy to cut and drill 100% recyclable
Concrete structure
L
Applications Fender pile rubbing strips Facing strips for berths Workboat beltings Lock protection Lock gate mitres
øD
ød
Steel structure
Standard drilling diameters
Timber structure
D
d
L
27
13
75
32
16
85
32
12
32
32
16
45
32
18
80
40
20
80
50
21
95
50
23
95
60
21
70
65
27
105
70
28
110
70
32
115
70
26
50
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–5
SLIDING FENDERS A
B
L
C1
C2
D
E
F
G
H
Flat bar
Bolt size
Weight
50
50
5500
25
n/a
32
16
0
50–100
n/a
n/a
M12
2.4
60
60
5500
30
n/a
32
16
0
50–100
n/a
n/a
M12
3.4
70
50
2500
25
32
32
16
0
75–125
250–300
n/a
M12
3.3
70
70
6500
30
32
32
16
0
75–125
250–300
n/a
M12
4.6
80
60
5000
30
32
32
16
0
75–125
250–300
n/a
M12
4.5
100
50
5500
25
32
32
16
0
75–125
250–300
n/a
M12
4.7
100 100
65 100
5500 6000
30 50
32 32
32 32
16 16
0 0
75–125 75–125
120
80
5000
40
40
40
20
0
120
120
6000
60
40
40
20
140
70
5500
35
40
40
20
0–50
100–150
300–350
160
70
5000
35
40
40
20
0–70
100–150
300–350
160
160
6000
80
40
40
20
0–80
100–150
170
120
5500
60
40
40
20
0–80
100–150
300–350
180
70
5000
35
46
50
23
0–80
125–175
350–450
180
180
6000
90
46
50
23
0–80
125–175
190
110
5000
55
46
50
23
0–90
125–175
350–450
80 × 10
M20
200
75
5000
35
46
50
23
0–100
125–175
350–450
n/a
M20
14.0
200
100
6000
50
46
50
23
0–100
125–175
350–450
80 × 10
M20
18.6
200
150
5500
75
46
50
23
0–100
125–175
350–450
80 × 10
M20
27.9
200 250
200 150
6000 6500
100 75
46 56
50 65
23 28
0–100 0–130
250
160
5000
80
56
65
28
0–130
100–150
0
100–150
125–175 150–200 150–200
250
250
5000
125
56
65
28
0–130
300
100
5500
50
56
65
28
0–160
150–200
150–200
300 300 440
210 300 160
5000 5000 2000
105 150 80
56 72 56
70 70 70
36 36 36
0–160 0–160 0–300
175–225 175–225 175–225
250–300 250–300 300–350
300–350
300–350
350–450
350–450 450–550 450–550
450–550 450–550
n/a 50 × 6
M12 M12
n/a
M16
80 × 10
M16
G
H
B
H
9.1
n/a
M16
10.4
80 × 10
M16
øD
øE
F
Test method
Typical results
Unit
Density
ISO 1183-1
0.91–0.94
g/cm�
Molecular weight
Light diffusion method
~200,000
g/mol
Dynamic friction
–
0.20–0.25
–
Yield strength
DIN 53504
10–15
MPa
Shore hardness
DIN 53505
48–50
Shore D
Abrasion index (sand slurry)
ISO/DIS 15527 (Draft) FQ1000-V = 100
~400
–
−50 to +50
°C
2 × 10−4
K −1
Operating temperature Thermal expansion
DIN 53752
Property values are from tests on production materials. HD-PE is manufactured from a blend of virgin and recycled stock which can cause limited variations in test results.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
24.1
80 × 10
M16
19.0
n/a
M20
11.7
80 × 10
M20
80 × 10 80 × 10
M20 M24
80 × 10
M24
100 × 10 n/a
M24 M24
500–600 100 × 12 500–600 120 × 12 500–600 100 × 12
G 10
øE
Property
13.4
M16
M30 M30 M30
30.2 19.4
37.6 34.8 37.2
58.1 27.9
58.6 84.6 66.8
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
C2
A
8.9
n/a
Preferred sizes are in bold. Full or half lengths as standard.
B C1
6.1 9.3
A
H
H
6–6
SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER® SeaPile and SeaTimber are advanced composite plastics with superior properties to timber, steel and concrete for many marine structures and applications. They can withstand heavy impacts by absorption of energy through recoverable de�ection. SeaPile and SeaTimber never rot, corrode or decay. They are impervious to marine borers, yet are totally non-polluting. Manufactured from a recycled plastic matrix with unique glass fibre reinforcement bars, the stiffness of SeaPile and SeaTimber can be varied and controlled to suit each project. This makes the material the ideal choice for fenders, to build marine structures, and for coastal protection without damaging the environment.
Features Low lifecycle cost Will not rot, corrode or decay Unaffected by marine borers Choice of modulus to suit different applications Can be pile driven, sawn and drilled Low friction coefficient Ultra low maintenance Custom colours available Unlimited lengths*
Applications Fender piles and systems Structural piles Bridge protection Guidewalls and locks Corner fenders Dolphins Navigation markers Walings and bullrails * subject to transport restrictions
Durable low friction skin
SeaTimber
100% recycled plastic matrix
SeaPile Fibreglass reinforcements
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–7
SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER® SeaPile Diameter inch mm
SeaPile section
10 (6-1) 10 (6-1.25) 10 (6-1.375) 10 (8-1) 10 (8-1.25) 10 (8-1.375) 10 (8-1.5) 10 (8-1.625) 13 (8-1) 13 (8-1.25) 13 (8-1.375) 13 (12-1) 13 (12-1.25) 13 (12-1.375) 13 (12-1.5) 13 (12-1.625) 16 (16-1) 16 (16-1.25) 16 (16-1.375) 16 (16-1.5) 16 (16-1.625) 16 (16-1.75)
Rebar quantity
6
10
254 8
8
13
330 12
16
406
16
Size
Yield
Weight
inch
mm
lb/in�
MPa
lb/ft
kg/m
1 1.25 1.375 1 1.25 1.375 1.5 1.625 1 1.25 1.375 1 1.25 1.375 1.5 1.625 1 1.25 1.375 1.5 1.625 1.75
25 32 35 25 32 35 38 41 25 32 35 25 32 35 38 41 25 32 35 38 41 44
4300 5837 6766 5431 7482 8720 10036 11424 3842 5207 6028 5365 7413 8643 9947 11315 4928 6785 7899 9078 10313 11599
29.65 40.24 46.65 37.45 51.59 60.12 69.20 78.77 26.49 35.90 41.56 36.99 51.11 59.59 68.58 78.01 33.98 46.78 54.46 62.59 71.11 79.97
24–29 25–31 26–32 25–35 26–32 27–33 28–35 29–36 39–48 41–50 42–51 41–50 43–53 45–55 46–57 48–59 61–74 64–78 66–81 68–83 70–86 73–89
36–43 37–46 39–48 37–52 39–48 40–49 42–52 43–54 58–71 61–74 63–76 61–74 64–79 67–82 68–85 71–88 91–110 95–116 98–121 101–124 104–128 109–132
Modulus, stiffness and other material properties are available on request.
SeaTimber SeaTimber section
12 × 8 (No rebar) 12 × 8 (4-1) 12 × 8 (4-1.25) 12 × 8 (4-1.375) 12 × 8 (4-1.5) 12 × 8 (4-1.625) 12 × 8 (4-1.75) 10 × 10 (No rebar) 10 × 10 (4-1) 10 × 10 (4-1.25) 10 × 10 (4-1.375) 10 × 10 (4-1.5) 10 × 10 (4-1.625) 10 × 10 (4-1.75) 12 × 12 (No rebar) 12 × 12 (4-1) 12 × 12 (4-1.25) 12 × 12 (4-1.375) 12 × 12 (4-1.5) 12 × 12 (4-1.625)
Height inch mm
Width inch mm
Rebar qty
–
12
305
8
254
4
–
10
305
10
254
4
– 12
305
12
305
4
Size inch mm
– 1 1.25 1.375 1.5 1.625 1.75 – 1 1.25 1.375 1.5 1.625 1.75 – 1 1.25 1.375 1.5 1.625
– 25 32 35 38 41 44 – 25 32 35 38 41 44 – 25 32 35 38 41
Modulus, stiffness and other material properties are available on request.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Yield X-X lb/in� MPa
Yield Y-Y lb/in� MPa
860 3868 5155 5928 6746 7606 8501 860 3443 4517 5163 5849 6571 7325 860 2706 3466 3923 4406 4914
860 3421 4381 4964 5588 6250 6948 860 3443 4517 5163 5849 6571 7325 860 2706 3466 3923 4406 4914
5.93 26.67 35.54 40.87 46.51 52.44 58.61 5.93 23.74 31.14 35.6 40.33 45.31 50.5 5.93 18.66 23.90 27.05 30.38 33.88
5.93 23.59 30.21 34.23 38.53 43.09 47.90 5.93 23.74 31.14 35.60 40.33 45.31 50.5 5.93 18.66 23.90 27.05 30.38 33.88
Weight lb/ft kg/m
25–31 26–32 27–33 28–34 28–35 29–35 29–36 27–33 28–35 29–36 30–36 30–37 31–38 31–38 39–47 40–49 41–50 41–51 42–51 42–52
37–46 39–48 40–49 42–51 42–52 43–52 43–54 40–49 42–52 43–54 45–54 45–55 46–57 46–57 58–70 60–73 61–74 61–76 63–76 63–77
6–8
SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER® Lifecycle cost
s r e u t c r u t s n e d o o W
s t s o c e v i t a l e R
Break-even in 6 years SeaPile 0
0
5
10
15
20
25
Years
SeaPile and SeaTimber cost far less during the lifetime of a structure because they need little if any maintenance. Real comparisons with timber structures show the break-even point is just six years, sometimes far less.
d a o L
F G – r b e i m
T a e S
d e r c f o n i r e
Based on 250×250mm test sections
SeaPile and SeaTimber can resist greater loads and de�ections than wood, concrete and steel. When tested to ultimate load, SeaPile and SeaTimber absorb 15 times the energy of Southern Yellow Pine. In practical terms this means less damage, maintenance and downtime, leading to a lower lifecycle cost.
c e d n f o r
i n r e – u e r
i m b
T a S e
t h e r n S o u
P ine Y e l lo w
De�ection
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–9
SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER® Installation
Piling
Cutting
Drilling
Various connecting methods are available to increase pile length. SeaPile and SeaTimber lengths can also be attached to steel pile extensions. A DVD explaining SeaPile and SeaTimber handling and installation methods is available.
Pile driving data 4 Soil profile
Pile length 15.2m, �at cut ends, no drive shoe, no drive helmet, hammer: MKT 9B3 Pile length 16.8t, with drive shoe and drive helmet, hammer: MKT 9B3
6
Very loose sand and silt
8 ) s e r t e m10 ( h t p e D
Tip elevation = 9.7 metres
Dense to very dense layered clayey sand and sandy clay
12
14
16
Bottom of test boring
Tip elevation = 14.9 metres
0
10
20
30 40 50 Hammer blows per metre
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
60
70
80
90
100
6–10
SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER® Applications The SeaPile can generally be used in the same applications as traditional timber piling. Examples include:
Dolphins
Fender piling
Light structural piling Wale
Dock Chock
Pile 3-pile cluster
7-pile cluster
19-pile cluster
Dolphins, or groups of piles, are placed near piers and wharves to guide vessels into their moorings, to fend them away from structures, or to serve as mooring points. Compared with timber, considerably fewer SeaPiles are needed to absorb the same impact energy.
Piles are used extensively as vertical fenders set out in front of a marine structure. During the berthing of a ship, fender piles act as a buffer to absorb and dissipate the impact energy of the ship. They also provide a barrier to prevent vessels from going underneath the pier.
Navigational aids
Bridge pier protection
Piles are used to support the loads of light-duty piers and wharves. Structural piling generally uses bracing between piles to increase the strength and stiffness of the foundation for the structure.
Piles and dolphins are widely used to create protective structures for bridge piers, and to guide vessels into the channel and away from bridge supports. 3-pile clusters are used in impact zones, single piles in less vulnerable areas.
e r g e d i i r P B
e r g e d i i r P B
Centreline of channel
Single piles or dolphins are used to support lights, daybeacons, fog signals and radar beacons.
Refer to the SeaPile and SeaTimber Design Manual for more information and examples.
e r g e d i i r P B
e r g e d i i r P B
Centreline of bridge
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–11
SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER® Proven in practice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–12
SEACAMEL® Floating camels are used in many military and commercial ports to maintain standoff between the vessel and pier face. They also transmit forces over a greater length of structure to avoid concentrated loads. SeaCamels are constructed from SeaPile, SeaTimber or Ecoboard engineered plastics, which combine high strength with positive buoyancy and will not crush, split, corrode or decay. SeaCamels are available in many configurations, either preassembled or in kit form. They can be fitted with access decks and face fenders as well as a variety of mooring options.
hawse pipe
SeaPile (up to 400mm diameter)
mooring chain
anchor weight
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–13
SEACAMEL® non-slip fibreglass deck
ultra-low maintenance SeaTimber construction
additional buoyancy tanks if required
Lengths up to 11.8m can be containerised for easy shipment.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–14
ECOBOARD® Ecoboard structures outlast any wood or ‘wood �our’ plastic composites, lowering your costs for years to come. Ecoboard is maintenance-free and needs zero care, and because Ecoboard doesn’t deteriorate even in extreme environments, the ongoing cost of treating and repairing materials becomes a thing of the past. Ecoboard is durable and versatile. The SR and SF grades are both based on the same 100% recycled and carefully graded polyethylene which is non-toxic and stable. Whether strengthened with chopped glass fibres (SF) or with high performance glass fibre rebars (SR), Ecoboard comes in many standard and custom sections to suit light, medium and heavy duty applications. Ecoboard looks great too. With a choice of natural or textured finishes in popular UV-stabilised colours, designers can be confident that their Ecoboard structures will stay looking good for decades to come – no cracking or chipping, no warping or corrosion, no mould or decay. And if that still isn’t enough to convince you to use Ecoboard for your next project then maybe Trelleborg’s 50 year limited warranty will.
Materials Ecoboard Ecoboard is made from recycled polyethylene, reinforced with chopped glass fibre or GRP rebars. It doesn’t rot, split or chip, and is ideal for long term immersion in water.
Wood
50 year warranty
Insect and borer resistant
Rot and decay resistant
*
Load bearing and structural
Wood All wood suffers environmental attack, sometimes reduced by periodic chemical treatments. Wood can crack, split and splinter, is eaten by borers and suffers fungal and bacterial decay.
*
Non-splintering
Timber composites Timber composites are wood ‘�our’ in a plastic matrix. They overcome some disadvantages of natural timber but composites will still decay and rot over time, particularly when damp.
Composite Ecoboard®
Low friction
Maintenance free
Colour stability
Non-leaching/toxin-free
100% recycled feedstock
Recyclable
Long-term aesthetics
Precurving and forming
* Chemical treatments required.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–15
ECOBOARD® Joists & spans
Sizes
Ecoboard’s different grades give the right amounts of �exibility and strength just where they are needed.
Profile
3.0
4.0
Ecoboard SF
102
102
3.0
5.5
Chopped glass fibre reinforced polyethylene
127
127
4.6
11.3
152
152
9.1
16.2
Greater strength and modulus allows larger unsupported spans and fewer joists. Perfect for municipal structures and medium to heavy duty constructions.
216
216
9.1
32.7
254
254
9.1
45.5
305
305
7.6
65.5
51 × 51
38 × 38
3.0
1.3
102 × 102
89 × 89
3.7
6.4
152 × 152
140 × 140
4.9
15.9
203 × 203
191 × 191
6.1
32.7
32 × 152
32 × 140
3.7
3.9
32 × 254
32 × 241
3.7
6.8
51 × 76
38 × 64
3.7
2.1
51 × 102
38 × 89
4.9
3.1
51 × 152
38 × 140
6.1
4.8
51 × 203
38 × 191
4.9
6.4
51 × 254
38 × 241
5.5
8.0
51 × 305
38 × 292
3.7
9.8
76 × 102
64 × 89
3.7
5.1
76 × 152
64 × 140
3.7
7.9
76 × 203
64 × 191
4.9
10.9
76 × 254
64 × 267
5.5
13.7
76 × 305
64 × 292
3.7
16.7
102 × 152
89 × 140
3.7
11.0
102 × 203
89 × 191
3.7
14.7
102 × 254
89 × 241
3.7
19.0
102 × 305
89 × 292
5.5
23.2
152 × 203
140 × 191
3.7
23.8
152 × 254
140 × 241
4.9
30.4
152 × 305
140 × 292
4.9
36.0
203 × 254
191 × 241
4.9
41.4
51 × 254
38 × 230
5.5
8.0
51 × 305
38 × 285
3.7
9.8
76 × 254
64 × 230
5.5
13.7
76 × 305
64 × 285
3.7
16.5
102 × 305
89 × 285
5.5
23.2
100% polyethylene with fibreglass reinforcement bars
Square
Rectangular
Maximum structural strength for bearing piles and large freespan joists. The ultimate material for heavy duty, load-bearing structures.
Colours
l d n e a r o n o o a t o w d r c w o d s e r a d n h C B e a C R S
Choose from our standard range, or ask about custom colours. Slight variations may occur during manufacture.
Natural
Max length Weight (m) (kg/m)
76
Ecoboard SR
t e l a S
Finished (mm)
76
Round
t e i h W
Nominal (mm)
Knurled
Wood
Tongue & groove
1 Other sizes, sections and lengths are available. Please ask. 2 Nominal sizes relate to industry standard descriptions for
Ecoboard’s natural finish is gently textured and pleasant to the touch. The wood grain texture blends in well, whilst the knurled texture provides a low-slip finish.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
lumber sections. Actual sizes should be used for design. 3 Thermal expansion must be allowed for in designs. 4 Weight may vary due to manufacturing methods and tolerances.
6–16
ECOBOARD® Design fabrication
Chamfering Drilling and counterboring Shaping Pre-curving*
Trelleborg can supply everything from plain lengths to a factory fabricated kit of parts, fully engineered and ready for rapid site assembly. Please ask for details
* SF grades only.
Sustainability Sustainability is about economic growth, social development and a healthy environment. Within Trelleborg the ethos of sustainability involves everybody and everything we do or make, becoming a natural part of our daily business operations. Ecoboard is a perfect example. Made from recycled raw materials in in a clean and energy efficient factor y. It is toxin-free, inert and non-polluting. Ecoboard is long lasting but even at the end of it’s useful service life it can be fully recycled and used again. Visit www.trelleborg.com/sustainability to to learn more about Trelleborg’s efforts to build a sustainable environment within a commercial world.
50 Year Warranty
50 Y Y ear L L imit ed W W ar r ra nt y y f f o or r E E co b bo a o r d d®
Please refer to your local office for full details of the Ecoboard 50 Year Limited Warranty backed by Trelleborg. Founded in 1905, Trelleborg now operates in 40 countries, employs over 22,000 people and has annual sales of $4 billion.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
6–17
ECOBOARD® Proven Pro ven in practice p ractice
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S06-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Tug Fenders
Tug Cylindricals M-Fenders W-Fenders Block Fenders Composites Extrusions Section 7 r a m n a S f o y s e t r u o c e g a m I
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100- S07-V S07-V1.1-EN 1.1-EN
7–2
TUG FENDERS Tug fenders must work harder, for longer and under more extreme conditions than any other fender type. Tugs may be fitted with up to four types of fender – each type serving a particular application. As many tugs become more powerful, some exceeding 100t bollard pull, choosing the right type, size and arrangement of fenders becomes critical. When selecting fenders, designers should consider:
Bollard pull Initial contact loads Dynamic load effects Friction requirements Pushing angles Hull attachment Fender tolerances Material quality Spares availability
Cylindrical fenders
Side beltings
Fitted to the bow/stern of tugs and usually used to push against �ared hulls and in open sea conditions.
D, Square and Wing-D fenders are often used as side beltings to protect the vessel during escort duties and when coming alongside.
Pushing fenders
Block, Cube and W- and Mfenders provide large contact surfaces for low hull pressures. Their grooved surfaces provide exceptional grip.
Transition Blocks
Transition Blocks are used to provide a smooth interface between side beltings and bow/stern fenders.
Contact your local office for further information and advice.
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–3
TUG CYLINDRICALS Large cylindrical fenders are often used as the primary pushing fenders on the bow or stern of modern tugs. Their round shape is ideal for working with large bow �ares (like container ships), but are equally good for pushing �at-sided vessels. Tug Cylindricals come in diameters to 1000mm and in very long continuous or spigot-joined lengths. A longitudinal chain runs down the centre of the fender, supplemented by circumferential straps or chains which are recessed into grooves. Tapered ends are also available.
øD
ød
A
C
øG
25 250
125
200
Bmax
570
500
190
75
45.5
30 300
150
225
600
700
225
75
65.2
38 3 80
190
280
650
800
280
100
105
40 4 00
200
300
670
800
300
100
116
45 4 50
225
300
700
850
350
100
147
50 5 00
250
300
730
900
375
100
181
60 6 00
300
350
800
900
450
125
255
800
400
350
930
1000
600
125
453
900
450
350
1000
1100
675
150
573
1000
500
350
1060
1200
750
150
707
Groove size varies according to attachment method.
øJ
Weight
[ Units: Units: mm, k g/m ]
Lengths 2–13m in one sec tion, spigot joined for longer lengths.
d
C
d
øJ ød
øG
A
øD
B
B
B L
Attachment Smaller fenders (≤500mm diameter) are usually fixed by a longitudinal chain through the bore of the fender, connected to the hull by turnbuckles to tension the chain. Larger fenders often use supplementary chains or straps around the fender. Curve Radius Tug Cylindrical fenders are made in straight lengths but can be pulled around the bow or stern radius.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. M1100-S07-V1. 1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Chain
Strap
øD
øD
R R≥4 × øD
R
7–4
M-FENDERS M-Fenders have a large and �exible contact face which exerts a low pressure during pushing operations. The grooves provide extra grip and the triple legs give a strong attachment to the tug. M-Fenders can also be fitted around tight curves, whilst their relative low weight adds to tug stability.
Features Heavy-duty design Triple-leg attachment Soft, �exible face Grooved for extra grip Low weight per m� Fits around tight bends Dimensions Applications All types of tug Pontoon protection Special corner fenders Note: M-Fenders and W-Fenders are not interchangeable.
Type
A
Fixing B
C
øD
E
F
Lmax
Weight
Pin
M400 400 200
40
23
50
150
2000
56
ø20
100 × 15 450
M500 500 250
50
27
60
190
2000
89
ø24
125 × 20 550
M600 600 300
60
33
70
230
2000
132
ø30
150 × 20 650
[ Units: mm, kg/m ]
900
Flat bar
Rmin
[ Units: mm ]
B
A
800 M400 x 200
) e700 r t e m600 r e p N500 k ( e c r 400 o f n o300 i t c a e R200
B
M500 x 250 M600 x 300
E
øD F
C F
E
L
R (min)
Intermediate support when L > 1000mm Fixing pin
100 0 0
20
40 60 80 De�ection (mm)
100
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. M1100-S07-V1 .1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–5
W-FENDERS W-Fenders are made for the most extreme operating conditions. Originally developed by Trelleborg Bakker, the W-Fender is one of the most successful fenders for tugs in the world today. It has a unique ‘open bore’ design which makes installation very simple. The �exible legs allow W-Fenders to be curved around most hull shapes.
Features Extreme-duty design Twin-leg attachment Open bore for easy installation Grooved for extra grip Fits around tight bends Dimensions Applications Ocean-going tugs Icebreakers Large harbour tugs Bridge and pile protection Note: M-Fenders and W-Fenders are not interchangeable.
Type
A
Fixings B
C
D
E
F
K
Lmax
Weight
Pin
Flat bar
Rmin
W32-20 320 200 280 180 100
67 50 2000
51
ø25 100 × 20
600
W40-25 400 250 350 220 110
75 55 2000
81
ø30 120 × 20
800
W48-30 480 300 426 269 135
90 65 2000
120
ø40 140 × 20
900
90 100 75 2000
180
ø40 150 × 20 1000
W50-45 500 450 420 255
[ Units: mm, k g /m ]
[ Units: mm ]
A
600
B
W32-20
500
W40-25
) e r t e m400 r e p N k ( e300 c r o f n o i t 200 c a e R
B
W48-30
E D C L
Intermediate support when L > 1000mm Fixing pin
100
R (min)
0 0
F
K
20
40 60 De�ection (mm)
80
100
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. M1100-S07-V1. 1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–6
BLOCK FENDERS Block and Cube Fenders have a traditional ‘keyhole’ profile which is strong and ideal for heavyheavy-duty duty applications. There is a choice of grooved or �at face fenders depending on the required friction levels. Where very low friction is needed, Block and Cube Fenders can also be made as Composite fenders with integral UHMW-PE faces. This is useful for tugs that operate in heavy swell and storm conditions.
Block Fender dimensions Features Heavy-duty design Traditional, proven shape Grooved or smooth face Optional UHMW-PE face
Fixings
A
B
C
øD
E
Pin
Flat bar
200
200
35
28
130
øG
90
2000
Lmax
Weight
33
ø25
100 × 15
450
250
250
50
33
150
100
2000
54
ø30
125 × 20
600
300
300
60
33
180
115
1750
80
ø30
150 × 20
800
350
350
70
33
210
125
2000
114
ø30
175 × 25 1000
[ Units: mm, kg/m ]
Note: M-, W-, Block and Cube fenders are not interchangeable.
Cube Fender dimensions
Rmin
[ Units: mm ]
Fixings
A
B
C
øD
E
øG
L
Weight
250
250
50
33*
150
100
250
13
ø30* ø30 * 125 × 20
600
300
300
60
33*
180
115
200
16
ø30* ø30 * 150 × 25
800
* Optional 28mm and 25mm pin.
Pin
[ Units: Units: mm, kg ]
Flat bar
Rmin
[ Units: mm ]
B
900 200 x 200
800
A
250 x 250
) e r 700 t e m600 r e p N500 k ( e c r 400 o f n o300 i t c a e R200
300 x 300
L
øG
350 x 350
B
øD C C
E
C
L
Intermediate support when L > 1000mm Fixing pin
100
R (min)
0 0
20
40 60 80 De�ection (mm)
100
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. M1100-S07-V1 .1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–7
COMPOSITE FENDERS Composite fenders* combine rubber for resilience and UHMW-PE for low-friction and wear resistant properties. The two materials are bonded with a special vulcanising method – stronger and more reliable than a mechanical joint. Composite fenders are used where the simplicity of extrusions are required but with lower shear forces. * Also called Rubbylene
CF-A series
CF-B series Weight
H
Flat bar
Bolt size
Std Length
CF-A
CF-B
90–130
200–300
50 × 6
M12
3000
10.3
11.1
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
3000
21.5
27.0
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
3000
19.2
24.8
20
130–180
300–400
80 × 10
M20
3000
40.2
48.0
45
20
130–180
300–400
80 × 10
M20
3000
36.2
48.0
50
25
140–200
350–450
100 × 10
M24
2000
60.2
75.0
60
30
140–200
350–450
110 × 12
M24
3700
92.1
108
A
B
øC*
t
øD
E
F
G
100
100
30
20
15
25
10
150
150
65
20
20
30
12
165
125
65
20
20
35
15
200
200
75
25
25
45
200
200
100
25
25
250
250
100
30
30
300
300
125
30
30
* Dimension only applies to CF-A fender.
CF-C series A
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
CF-D series
B
øC*
a
80
80
42
100
100
45
120
120
150
150
Flat bar
Bolt size
Std Length
90–130
200–300
45 × 6
M12
2000
5.4
7.0
8
90–130
200–300
45 × 6
M12
2000
8.4
11.0
30
10
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
2000
12.2
15.8
30
12
110–150
250–350
60 × 8
M16
3000
19.7
24.8
c
t
øD
E
60
40
44
10
15
25
6
74
50
56
10
15
25
62
88
60
67
12
20
73
110
75
83
15
20
F
G
* Dimension only applies to CF-C fender.
B
E
t
F
øC
a A
E
B
t
G
H
F
øC
A
b c UHMW-PE face (black as standard)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
CF-C
CF-D
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
øD
øD
Weight
H
b
H
7–8
EXTRUDED FENDERS Square and D-section extruded profiles are widely used as beltings on tugs and other workboats. DC and SC fenders have a circular bore for extra wall thickness and durability. DD and SD fenders have a D-bore for securing with a �at bar. Extruded fenders are available in many other sections as well. All can be cut to length, drilled, angle cut or pre-curved as required.
Fender E size (kNm)
R (kN)
E (kNm)
R (kN)
DC-fenders Flat bar
Bolt size
Weight
90–130 200–300
50 × 6
M12
10.1
12
110–150 250–350
60 × 8
M16
20.6
45
15
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
38.5
30
50
20
140–200 350–450 100 × 10
M24
59.0
125
30
60
25
140–200 350–450 110 × 12
M24
83.7
350
150
35
70
25
140–200 350–450 120 × 12
M30
113
400
400
175
35
80
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
146
400
400
200
35
80
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
137
500
500
250
35
100
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M36
214
A
B
100
100
150
øC
øD
E
F
30
15
25
10
150
65
20
30
200
200
75
25
250
250
100
300
300
350
G
H
[ Units: mm, kg/m ]
SC-fenders
100
1.9
157
2.7
157
150
4.2
235
6.4
235
A
B
200
7.5
314
11.3
314
100
100
150 165
150 125
øC
øD
E
F
30
15
25
10
65 65
20 20
30 30
12 15
Flat bar
Bolt size
Weight
90–130 200–300
50 × 6
M12
11.4
110–150 250–350 110–150 250–350
60 × 8 60 × 8
M16 M16
23.6 21.3
G
H
250
11.7
392
17.7
392
300
16.9
471
25.5
471
200
200
75
25
45
15
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
43.8
350
22.9
549
34.3
589
200
200
100
25
40
15
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
39.5
400
29.4
628
45.1
628
250
200
80
30
45
20
140–200 350–450
90 × 10
M24
55.3
250
250
100
30
50
20
140–200 350–450 100 × 10
M24
67.2
300 300
250 300
100 125
30 30
50 60
25 25
140–200 350–450 100 × 10 140–200 350–450 110 × 12
M24 M24
82.6 95.6
350
350
150
35
65
25
140–200 350–450 120 × 12
M30
126
350
350
175
35
65
25
140–200 350–450 120 × 12
M30
121
400
400
200
35
70
30
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
158
500
500
250
45
90
40
150–230 400–500 150 × 20
M36
247
500
46.0
785
70.5
785
Values are per metre.
120 Rated Reaction
) 100 d e t a R 80 f o % ( 60 n o i t 40 c a e R 20
120 100 80 60 40 20 0
n i o c t a R e
y e r g E n
0 0
10
20
30
40
) d e t a R f o % ( y g r e n E
[ Units: mm, kg/m ]
E
B
F
G
H
H
øD øC
A
50
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–9
EXTRUDED FENDERS
DD-series A
Fender E size (kNm)
R (kN)
E (kNm)
R (kN)
B
C
D
øE
øF
80
70
45
30
30
15
100
100
50
45
30
125
125
60
60
40
150
150
75
75
200
150
100
200
200
250 250
15
90–130 200–300
40 × 5
M12
8.5
20
110–150 250–300
50 × 6
M16
13.2
40
20
110–150 250–300
60 × 8
M16
18.5
80
50
25
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
23.1
100
100
50
25
130–180 300–400
80 × 10
M20
32.9
200
125
100
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
39.9
250
125
125
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
51.5
300
300
150
150
60
30
140–200 350–450 110 × 12
M24
74.1
350
350
175
175
75
35
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
101
380
380
190
190
75
35
140–200 350–450 140 × 15
M30
119
400
300
175
150
75
35
140–200 350–450 130 × 15
M30
99
400
400
200
200
75
35
140–200 350–450 150 × 15
M30
132
500
500
250
250
90
45
160–230 400–500 180 × 20
M36
206
2.7
136
150
3.2
115
6.4
206
200
5.7
153
11.3
275
A
B
250
8.9
191
17.6
343
100
300
12.9
230
25.5
412
350
17.6
268
34.3
471
45.2
589
500
35.9
383
70.7
736
Values are per metre.
120 Rated Reaction
) 100 d e t a R 80 f o % ( 60 n o i t 40 c a e R 20
120 100 80 60 40 20 0
n i o c t a R e
y e r g E n
0 0
10
20
30
40
4.8
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
SD-series C
D
øE
øF
G
H
Flat bar
100
50
45
30
15
90–130
200–300
40 × 5
M12
9.9
150
150
70
65
40
20
110–150 250–300
50 × 8
M16
22.7
165
125
80
60
40
20
110–150 250–300
60 × 8
M16
20.3
200
150
90
65
50
25
130–180 300–400
70 × 10
M20
30.8
200
200
90
95
50
25
130–180 300–400
70 × 10
M20
39.8
250
200
120
95
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
49.4
250
250
120
120
60
30
140–200 350–450
90 × 12
M24
61.1
300
250
140
115
60
30
140–200 350–450 100 × 12
M24
75.0
300
300
125
135
60
30
140–200 350–450 100 × 12
M24
92.0
400
400
200
200
75
35
140–200 350–450 150 × 15
M30
153
500
500
250
250
90
45
160–230 400–500 180 × 20
M36
239
) d e t a R f o % ( y g r e n E
Bolt size Weight
[ Units: mm, k g/m ]
G 25
B D
F
50
De�ection (%)
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S07-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Bolt size Weight
M12
77
306
Flat bar
35 × 5
1.4
23.0
H
90–130 200–300
100
400
G
øE C A
H
H
7–10
CHAINS & ACCESSORIES Open Link Chains øC
3.0D links
14 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 32 35 38 40 45 50 55 60
3.5D links
4.0D links
5.0D links
MBL
L
W
Weight
L
W
Weight
L
W
Weight
L
W
Weight
SL2
SL3
42 48 54 60 66 75 84 90 96 105 114 120 135 150 165 180
18 21 23 26 29 33 36 39 42 46 49 52 59 65 72 78
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.2 6.0 8.2 10.9 14.2
49 56 63 70 77 88 98 105 112 123 133 140 158 175 193 210
20 22 25 28 31 35 39 42 45 49 53 56 63 70 77 84
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.6 2.0 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.6 6.5 8.9 11.9 15.4
56 64 72 80 88 100 112 120 128 140 152 160 180 200 220 240
20 22 25 28 31 35 39 42 45 49 53 56 63 70 77 84
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 1.2 1.7 2.1 2.5 3.3 4.3 5.0 7.1 9.7 12.9 16.8
70 80 90 100 110 125 140 150 160 175 190 200 225 250 275 300
21 24 27 30 33 38 42 45 48 53 57 60 68 75 83 90
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.1 6.0 8.5 11.6 15.5 20.1
124 160 209 264 304 393 492 566 644 770 900 1010 1275 1570 1900 2260
154 202 262 330 380 491 616 706 804 964 1130 1260 1590 1960 2380 2770
[ Units: mm, kg/link, kN ]
L
W
øC
High Strength Shackles Dee shackle
ØD
ØF
ØH
G
13 16 19 22 25 28 32 35 38 45 50 57 65 75 89 102
16 19 22 25 28 32 35 38 42 50 57 65 70 80 95 108
26 32 38 44 50 56 64 70 76 90 100 114 130 150 178 204
22 27 31 36 43 47 51 57 60 74 83 95 105 127 146 165
Dee
E
ØJ
Weight
43 51 59 73 85 90 94 115 127 149 171 190 203 230 267 400
0.4 0.7 1.1 1.5 2.6 3.3 4.7 6.2 7.6 12.8 18.2 27.8 35.1 60.0 93.0 145
51 64 76 83 95 108 115 133 146 178 197 222 254 330 381 400
32 43 51 58 68 75 83 95 99 126 138 160 180 190 238 275
0.4 0.8 1.3 1.9 2.8 3.8 5.3 7.0 8.8 15.0 20.7 29.3 41.0 64.5 110 160
ØH ØF
120 195 285 390 510 570 720 810 1020 1500 2100 2550 3330 5100 7200 9000
[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]
ØJ
E
ØH G
NBL
ØD
E
Safety pin
Weight
Bow ØD
Bow shackle
E
G
MBL = Minimum Breaking Load (kN) NBL = Nominal Breaking Load (kN) Tolerance: all dimensions ±2%
ØF
M1100-S07-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–11
Proven in practice
© G r a e m e E w e n s
M1100-S07-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–12
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS For assistance with design or pricing of tug fenders, please complete this form and fax or email it to your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office, together with legible drawings if possible. PROJECT DETAILS
PROJECT STATUS
Operating Port/Region
TMS Ref:
Owner/Operator
Design
Naval Architect
Under Construction
Shipyard
Refit
VESSEL
Name or Yard Number: ________________________________________________
Overall length _________________ m
Length at waterline _____________ m
Beam (moulded) _______________m
Draft (max) ___________________ m
Displacement __________________ t
Bollard pull (BP) _________________t
Pushing hull pressure ________ t/m�
Operating angle (α) ________ degrees
Flare angle (β) ___________ degrees
Operating Angle
β
α
CYLINDRICAL FENDER
Bow
Stern
Inside diameter _______________mm
Outside diameter ______________mm
Length _______________________ m
Joints allowed:
Longitudinal chain: Circumferential fixings:
yes chain
no web
yes
no
Tapered ends:
yes
no
Size_____________________mm not required
M1100-S07-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
7–13
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PUSHING FENDERS Bow
Stern
M-Type
BOW
W-Type
Keyhole STERN
Section Size (mm)
SIDE BELTINGS
(tick required section) Section size __________________mm
Approx. length _________________ m
Joints allowed:
Plugged joints:
yes
no
Transition Blocks:
Bow:
DRAWINGS
yes
yes no
Stern:
Corrosivity
Minimum ________ (°C)
low
medium
Maximum _______ (°C)
high
extreme
SAFETY
Maximum safety
Lowest price
Not safety-critical
Name
Tel
Company
Fax
Position
Mobile
Address
Email
© Trelleborg AB, 2007
no
Highest quality
FURTHER DETAILS AVAILABLE FROM
Web
yes
no
QUALITY
Operating temperature
M1100-S07-V1.1-EN
no
Full drawings available yes
ENVIRONMENT
(total port and starboard)
Safety Products
Safety Ladders
Section 8
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S08-V1.1-EN
8–2
ML MODULAR LADDERS Modular ladders are �exible, corrosion resistant and can withstand most accidental impacts from smaller vessels. The step modules are made from polyurethane and can be linked together, combined with extensions and a variety of optional handrails to suit many applications.
240
With PU ladder extensions
647
300
Safety ladder step
M20 anchors
Safety ladder extension connection part
Examples of optional handrails
Safety ladder extension Steel weight
With steel extensions
240
647
300
Can also be supplied with chain extension
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S08-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
8–3
LF-250 LADDERS The LF-250 integrates the functions of a ladder and a fender into a single unit. They are very robust but remain �exible to reduce accident damage and help protect the wharf when small craft berth. Available in a range of lengths, the LF-250 Ladder Fender can also be fitted with a rubber encased chain extension to suit overhanging structures. 645 600 250
340 300 100
Dimensions 600 typ. A
Rungs
Anchors
Weight
1100
4
2×3
69
1400
5
2×3
88
1700
6
2×4
107
2000
7
2×4
125
2300
8
2×5
145
2600
9
2×5
164
2900
10
2×6
183
[ Units: mm, k g]
A 300 typ.
ø50 �exible rungs 1500
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S08-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Rubber ladder fender
Chain ladder extension
M20 anchors
Accessories
Fender Panels Chains Shackles Brackets NC3 Anchors EC2 Anchors Fixing Bolts Section 9
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S09-V1.1-EN
9–2
FENDER PANELS Fender panels are just as important as the rubber units on high performance systems. That’s why every panel is purpose designed using structural analysis programs and 3D CAD modelling for optimum strength. Fender panels distribute reaction forces to provide low hull pressures and cope with large tidal variations. They can also be designed to resist line loads from belted ships, or even point loads in special cases. Optional lead-in bevels reduce the snagging risk, whilst brackets (where required) provide highly secure connection points for chains. Closed box designs are used almost exclusively – all fully sealed and pressure checked. Corrosion protection is provided by high durability C5M class paint systems to ISO 12944, and additional corrosion allowances can be designed in where required.
Specification and design of panels Panel specifications and designs should consider:
Features and options Closed box steel structure Internal structural members Blind boss fender connections Pressure tested for watertightness C5M modified epoxy paint* Polyurethane topcoat † (RAL5005 blue) Studs for UHMW-PE face pads Chain brackets Lifting points Lead-in bevels and chamfers
Hull pressures and tidal range Lead-in bevels and chamfers Bending moment and shear Local buckling Limit state load factors Steel grade Permissible stresses Weld sizes and types Pressure test method Rubber fender connections UHMW-PE attachment Chain connections Lifting points Paint systems Corrosion allowance Maintenance and service life
* Other options available † Alternative colours on request
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
9–3
FENDER PANELS 10
1
Closed box steel structure
2
Internal structural members
3
Blind boss fender connections
4
Shot blasted steel (SA2.5)
5
C5M modified epoxy paint*
6
Polyurethane topcoat (RAL5005 blue)†
7
Studs for UHMW-PE face pads
8
Chain brackets
9
Lifting points
10
Lead-in bevels and chamfers*
9
7
8
3
1
8
2 6 5 4
* Options available †
Alternative colours on request
Steel Properties Standard
EN 10025
JIS G-3101
Grade
PIANC steel thicknesses Yield Strength (min)
Tensile Strength (min)
Temperature
N/mm²
psi
N/mm²
psi
°C
°F
S235JR (1.0038)
235
34 000
360
52 000
–
–
S275JR (1.0044)
275
40 000
420
61 000
–
–
S355J2 (1.0570)
355
51 000
510
74 000
-20
-4
S355J0 (1.0553)
355
51 000
510
74 000
0
32
SS41
235
34 000
402
58 000
0
32
SS50
275
40 000
402
58 000
0
32
SM50
314
46 000
490
71 000
0
32
A-36
250
36 000
400
58 000
0
A-572
345
50 000
450
65 000
0
≥ 9mm
Internal (not exposed)
≥ 8mm
Corresponding minimum panel thickness will be 140–160mm (excluding UHMW-PE face pads) and often much greater.
Typical panel weights
Medium duty
250–300kg/m�
32
Heavy duty
300–400kg/m�
32
Extreme duty
UK, BS4360 has been replaced by BS EN 10025. The table above is for guidance only and is not comprehensive. Actual specifications should be consulted in all cases for the
M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Exposed one face
200–250kg/m�
The national standards of France and Germany have been replaced by EN 10025. In the
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)
≥ 12mm
Light duty
ASTM
full specifications of steel grades listed and other similar grades.
Exposed both faces
≥400kg/m�
9–4
CHAINS AND ACCESSORIES Some fender systems need chains to help support heavy components or to control how the fender de�ects and shears during impact. Open link or stud link chains are commonly used and these can be supplied in several different strength grades. Compatible accessories like shackles, brackets and U-anchors are also available. The nominal breaking load (NBL) of these items is matched to chains of similar capacity. Chains and accessories are supplied galvanised as standard. Chain brackets may also be supplied in an optional painted finish.
Typical chain system Features Choice of open or stud link chain Various link lengths available Proof load tested and certified Galvanised as standard Variety of matched accessories
1
1
Anchor bolts
2
Chain bracket (S-series)
3
3
Alloy D-shackle
4
4
Chain adjuster
5
Open link chain
6
Chain bracket (T-series)
2
Applications Large fender panels Cylindrical fenders Floating fender moorings Safety applications Lifting and installing
5
6
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
9–5
OPEN LINK CHAINS Open Link Chains øC
3.0D links L
W
14
42
18
16
48
21
18 20
54 60
22
3.5D links Weight
L
W
0.2
49
20
0.3
56
22
23 26
0.4 0.5
63 70
66
29
0.7
25
75
33
28
84
36
30
90
32 35 38
4.0D links Weight
L
W
0.2
56
20
0.3
64
22
25 28
0.4 0.6
72 80
77
31
0.8
1.1
88
35
1.4
98
39
39
1.8
105
96
42
2.2
105
46
2.8
114
49
40 45
120 135
52 59
50
150
55
165
60
180
5.0D links Weight
MBL
L
W
Weight
SL2
SL3
0.2
70
21
0.3
124
154
0.3
80
24
0.4
160
202
25 28
0.5 0.6
90 100
27 30
0.5 0.8
209 264
262 330
88
31
0.8
110
33
1.0
304
380
1.1
100
35
1.2
125
38
1.5
393
491
1.6
112
39
1.7
140
42
2.0
492
616
42
2.0
120
42
2.1
150
45
2.5
566
706
112
45
2.4
128
45
2.5
160
48
3.0
644
804
123
49
3.1
140
49
3.3
175
53
4.0
770
964
3.6
133
53
3.9
152
53
4.3
190
57
5.1
900
1130
4.2 6.0
140 158
56 63
4.6 6.5
160 180
56 63
5.0 7.1
200 225
60 68
6.0 8.5
1010 1275
1260 1590
65
8.2
175
70
8.9
200
70
9.7
250
75
11.6
1570
1960
72
10.9
193
77
11.9
220
77
12.9
275
83
15.5
1900
2380
78
14.2
210
84
15.4
240
84
16.8
300
90
20.1
2260
2770
[ Units: mm, kg/link, kN ]
L W
øC
Stud Link Chains
Chain Tensioners
Common link W Weight
øC
L
19 22 26 28 32 34 38 42 44 48 52 58 64 70 76 90
76 88 104 112 128 136 152 168 176 192 208 232 256 280 304 360
68 79 94 101 115 122 137 151 158 173 187 209 230 252 274 324
0.6 0.9 1.5 1.9 2.8 3.4 4.7 6.3 7.3 9.4 12.0 16.7 22.3 29.5 37.9 63.4
MBL SL2 (U2) SL3 (U3)
210 280 389 449 583 655 812 981 1080 1270 1480 1810 2190 2580 3010 4090
300 401 556 642 833 937 1160 1400 1540 1810 2110 2600 3130 3690 4300 5840
øA
B
W
L
Weight
NBL
24 30 36 42 48 56 64
160 200 230 270 300 350 400
60 76 90 106 120 140 160
270–350 340–420 400–500 470–600 540–680 620–800 700–900
9 17 27 44 63 96 146
360 560 800 1110 1440 1970 2570
[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]
L
B øA
[ Units: mm, kg/link, kN ]
L
W øC
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
MBL = Minimum Breaking Load (kN) NBL = Nominal Breaking Load (kN) Tolerance: all dimensions ±2%
W
9–6
HIGH STRENGTH SHACKLES ØD
ØF
ØH
Dee shackle
G
E
Bow shackle
Weight
E
ØJ
Weight
NBL
13
16
26
22
43
0.4
51
32
0.4
120
16
19
32
27
51
0.7
64
43
0.8
195
19
22
38
31
59
1.1
76
51
1.3
285
22
25
44
36
73
1.5
83
58
1.9
390
25
28
50
43
85
2.6
95
68
2.8
510
28
32
56
47
90
3.3
108
75
3.8
570
32
35
64
51
94
4.7
115
83
5.3
720
35
38
70
57
115
6.2
133
95
7.0
810
38
42
76
60
127
7.6
146
99
8.8
1020
45
50
90
74
149
12.8
178
126
15.0
1500
50
57
100
83
171
18.2
197
138
20.7
2100
57
65
114
95
190
27.8
222
160
29.3
2550
65
70
130
105
203
35.1
254
180
41.0
3330
75
80
150
127
230
60.0
330
190
64.5
5100
89
95
178
146
267
93.0
381
238
110
7200
102
108
204
165
400
145
400
275
160
9000
[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]
ØD
Dee
ØD
Bow
ØJ E
E
ØH
ØH
Safety pin
ØF
G
ØF
G
U-ANCHORS øD
E
26
260
30
F
G
J
K
t
Weight
NBL
60
320
104
50
12
3.4
209
300
70
370
120
50
15
5.1
264
34
340
70
410
136
60
15
7.3
304
36
360
70
430
144
60
20
8.6
393
42
420
90
510
168
70
20
13.7
492
44
440
100
540
176
80
20
16.1
566
48
480
100
580
192
80
25
20.5
644
50
500
110
610
200
90
25
23.7
770
56
560
120
680
224
100
30
33.4
900
60
600
130
730
240
110
30
41.1
1010
66
660
140
800
264
120
35
54.8
1275
74
740
160
900
296
130
40
76.9
1570
G t
E
F
ØD J K
[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
9–7
BRACKETS A
B
C
190
110
220
E
F
Ød
R
t
T
CB1/CB3
CB2
40
20
75
160
24
40
15
130
45
20
90
190
24
50
250
150
50
25
100
210
28
280
160
60
25
115
240
320
190
65
35
130
350
210
70
35
380
220
80
420
250
440
260
Single Lug
Twin Lug
Anchor
Shackle
ØD
Bolt Pin
ØD
30
19
28
M24 × 90
28
2/4 × M20
15
30
22
28
M24 × 90
28
2/4 × M20
55
20
40
25
36
M30 × 120
36
2/4 × M24
28
65
20
40
28
36
M30 × 120
36
2/4 × M24
270
36
75
25
45
32
42
M36 × 140
42
2/4 × M30
140
300
36
80
25
50
35
42
M36 × 140
42
2/4 × M30
35
155
320
42
85
30
50
38
50
M42 × 160
50
2/4 × M36
85
40
170
360
42
95
30
60
42
50
M42 × 170
50
2/4 × M36
90
40
180
360
50
100
30
60
44
60
M48 × 180
60
2/4 × M42
[ Units: mm, kN ]
S-Series A B
A B
A B
T
A B
A B
T
Ød
A B
T
Ød
Ød
T-Series A B
A B
t T t
A B
F
F
R
C t
CB1
t T t
A B
F ØD
R
t T t
A B
ØD
E
A B
R C
E
C t
t
CB2
All chain and accessory information is for guidance only. Every chain design should be checked to confirm suitability for the intended application. Select chain system components so MBL ≈ NBL. Every chain system is different. Check all dimensions for fit, clearance and tolerance.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
ØD
CB3
Chain brackets can be specified with 2 or 4 anchors to suit application and loads. If extra long life is required, add a corrosion allowance. Some slack in the chain is unavoidable and will not affect operation. For special sizes and applications, please refer to Trelleborg Marine Systems office.
9–8
FENDER FIXINGS NC3 anchors The NC3 is a traditional cast-in anchor design used for installing fenders to new concrete. The NC3 anchor has a threaded socket, a long tail and a square anchor plate. Non-standard sizes and other castin anchor types are available on request.
Thread
A
B
C
ØD
E
ØF
L
S(sq)
T
V
W
Weight
M20
40
20
60
20
150
30
200
60
10
5
8
0.9
M24
48
25
73
24
185
36
250
70
10
6
8
1.4
M30
60
35
95
30
200
45
270
80
10
6
8
2.3
M36
72
40
112
36
240
54
320
90
12
8
10
3.9
M42
84
50
134
42
270
63
360
110
12
10
10
6.2
M48
96
60
156
48
300
72
400
110
15
10
10
8.8
M56
112
70
182
56
340
84
550
120
15
12
12
13.2
Standard anchors are available in Grade 8.8/galvanised
[ Units: mm ]
or 100% St ainless Steel 316 (1.4401). Larger sizes and special dimensions available on request.
L
Always check
A
min/max clamping
E B
thickness and
C
socket depths actual threaded length on
The EC2 anchor is used for installing fenders onto existing concrete or where cast-in anchors are unsuitable. The anchor is usually secured into a drilled hole using special grout capsules. Non-standard sizes and other grout systems are available on request.
W W
ØE M
bolts.
EC2 anchors
V
T T ØD S (sq)
Thread
B
E
G
J
L (typ.)
øS
Capsule
M12
110
5–8
10
2.5
–
15
1 × C12
M16
140
6–9
13
3
175
20
1 × C16
M20
170
6–9
16
3
240
25
1 × C20
M24
210
8–12
19
4
270
28
1 × C24
M30
280
8–12
24
4
360
35
1 × C30
M36
330
10–15
29
5
420
40
1 × C30
M42
420
14–21
34
7
500
50
2 × C30
M48
480
16–24
38
8
580
54
2 × C30 + 1 × C24
M56
560
18–27
45
9
–
64
4 × C30
A = E +G +H + J, rounded up to nearest 10mm.
[ Units: mm ]
E = clear threads after assembly. H = clamping thickness of fender or bracket.
L A Always follow the manufacturer’s
G
B
J
instructions when
øS
installing EC2 anchors.
M12–M56 Grout Capsule
H
Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
9–9
FENDER FIXINGS Washers†
Thread area*
Size
Typical thread lengths‡
Nuts
L ≤ 125
L > 125
Thread
(mm�)
OD
ID
t
AF
T
M16
157
30
18
3
24
13
38
44
2.0
M20
245
37
22
3
30
16
46
52
2.5
M24
353
44
26
4
36
19
54
60
3.0
M30
561
56
33
4
46
24
66
72
3.5
M36
817
66
39
5
55
29
78
84
4.0
M42
1120
78
45
7
65
34
90
96
4.5
M48
1470
92
52
8
75
38
102
108
5.0
M56
2030
105
62
9
85
45
118
124
5.5
M64
2680
115
70
9
95
51
134
140
6.0
* According to BS 3 692: Table 13. † Standard ‡ Thread
pitch
[ Units: mm ]
washers g iven. Large OD washers available on request.
lengths may vary depending on standard. Other lengths available.
LT ØB
ID OD
L
t
S
T
Grades ISO 898 Galvanised
ISO 356 Stainless Steel *
Bolt grade
4.6
8.8
A-50†
A-70‡
Nut grade
4
8
A-50†
A-70‡
Tensile strength (MPa)
400
800
500
700
0.2% yield stress (MPa)
240
640
210
450
* Refer to p12–31 for further details about PREN and galling. † Size
≤ M39 unless agreed with manufacturer.
‡ Size ≤ M24 unless agreed
with manufacturer.
Standard manufacturing and perfor mance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39) M1100-S09-V1.1-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Fenders must be properly fixed to operate correctly. Anchors are supplied to suit new or existing structures, in various strength ratings and with the choice of galvanised or various stainless steels.
Bollards
Tee Horn Kidney
Section 10
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S10-V1.1-EN
10–2
BOLLARDS Trelleborg bollards come in many popular shapes and sizes to suit most docks, jetties and wharves. Standard material is spheroidal graphite (commonly called SG or ductile iron) which is both strong and resistant to corrosion, meaning Trelleborg bollards enjoy a long and trouble free service life. The shape of Trelleborg bollards has been refined with finite element techniques to optimize the geometry and anchor layout. Even at full working load, Trelleborg bollards remain highly stable and provide a safe and secure mooring.
Features High quality SG iron as standard Strong and durable designs Very low maintenance Large line angles possible Standard and custom anchors available
Tee
Horn
Kidney
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
10–3
TEE BOLLARDS
recommended line angle
P
Features General purpose applications up to 200 tonnes Suitable for steeper rope angles
180º
seaward side
Dimension
D G
G
F cL
L1°
E
L2°
G
L3° cL
C
B ØI A J
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
K
Bollard capacity (tonnes) 15
30
50
80
100
150
200
A
40
40
50
70
80
90
90
B
235
255
350
380
410
435
500
C
340
350
500
550
600
700
800
D
410
450
640
640
790
900
1000
E
335
375
540
550
640
750
850
F
80
100
150
160
175
200
225
G
155
175
250
250
325
350
375
ØI
160
200
260
280
350
400
450
J
205
225
320
320
395
450
500
K
130
150
220
230
245
300
350
L1º
30º
30º
30º
15º
10º
10º
0º
L2º
–
–
–
45º
40º
40º
36º
L3º
60º
60º
60º
N/A
80º
80º
72º
Bolts
M24
M30
M36
M42
M42
M48
M56
Bolt length
500
500
500
800
800
1000 1000
P*
60
60
70
90
100
110
110
Qty
5
5
5
6
7
7
8
*P = bolt protrusion = recess depth
[ Units: mm ]
10–4
HORN BOLLARDS
recommended line angle
P
Features General purpose applications up to 200 tonnes Suitable for steep rope angles Two lines may share a single bollard (subject to bollard capacity)
180º
seaward side
Dimension
D G
G
F cL
L1° G
E
L2°
L4° cL
L3°
C
B ØI A
J
K
Bollard capacity (tonnes) 15
30
50
80
100
150
200
A
40
40
50
70
80
90
90
B
370
410
500
520
570
585
660
C
400
440
600
660
750
850
930
D
410
480
640
650
800
920
1000
E
335
405
540
560
650
770
850
F
80
100
150
160
175
200
225
G
155
175
250
250
325
350
375
ØI
160
200
260
300
350
400
450
J
205
240
320
325
400
460
500
K
130
165
220
235
250
310
350
L1º
30º
30º
30º
15º
10º
10º
0º
L2º
–
–
–
45º
40º
40º
36º
L3º
60º
60º
60º
N/A
80º
80º
–
L4º
–
–
–
–
–
–
36º
Bolts
M24
M30
M36
M42
M42
M48
M56
Bolt length
500
500
500
800
800
1000 1000
P*
60
60
70
90
100
110
110
Qty
5
5
5
6
7
7
8
*P = bolt protrusion = recess depth
[ Units: mm ]
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
10–5
KIDNEY BOLLARDS
recommended line angle
P
Features General purpose applications up to 200 tonnes Avoid steep rope angles where possible Suitable for warping operations
180º
Dimension
seaward side
50
80
100
150
200
A
40
40
50
70
70
80
90
H
B
260
280
320
330
350
405
435
C
340
370
480
530
550
728
800
D
320
360
540
560
590
760
1000
E
320
360
540
460
490
660
850
F
–
–
–
–
175
250
300
G
–
–
–
–
175
250
300
F+G
220
260
400
320
350
500
600
H
220
260
400
420
450
600
750
ØI
160
200
260
280
300
400
450
J
160
180
270
160
295
380
475
K
160
180
270
160
195
280
375
L
–
–
–
–
50
50
50
Bolts
M24
M30
M36
M42
M42
M48
M56
Bolt length
500
500
500
800
800
1000 1000
P*
60
60
70
90
90
100
110
Qty
4
4
4
5
7
7
7
L
E G
C
B ØI A J
© Trelleborg AB, 2007
30
D
F
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN
Bollard capacity (tonnes) 15
K
*P = bolt protrusion = recess depth
[ Units: mm ]
10–6
BOLLARD SELECTION Design
Material specifications
Bollards and holding down bolts are designed with a minimum Factor of Safety against failure of 3.0 for SG Iron material grade 65 -45-12. Designs are typically based on the following:
Trelleborg bollards are produced to the highest specifications. The table gives indicative standards and grades but many other options are available on request. Material
Standards*
Grade(s)*
BS 5950: 200 0
Structural Use of Steelwork
Ductile Cast Iron
BS EN 1563 EN-GJS-450 or 500
BS 6349 Part 2: 1988
Marine Structures
(Spheroidal Graphite Iron)
ASTM A 536 65-45-12 or 80-55-6
AS 3990: 1993
Mechanical Equipment Design
Anchor bolts (galvanised)
ISO 898
Gr 8.8 (galvanised)
BS 3692
Gr 8.8 (galvanised)
ASTM
A325 (galvanised)
Blasting (standard)
N/A
Sweep blast
Blasting (high
ISO 12944
SA2.5
BS3416
Black bitumen (1 coat)
ISO 12944
Class C5M
Detailed calculations can be supplied on request. Different factors of safety can be used to suit other national standards and regulations.
performance)
Paint (standard)
Materials
Paint (high performance)
Trelleborg bollards are offered in Spheroidal Graphite Cast Iron (SG Iron), referred to as Ductile Cast Iron, because of its superior strength and resistance to corrosion. Ductile cast iron combines the best attributes of grey cast iron and cast steel without the disadvantages. Benefits Ductile Cast Iron (Spheroidal Graphite) Grey Cast Iron
Cast Steel
†
†
* In all cases equivalent alternative standards may apply. †
Other high performance paint systems available on request.
Protective coatings
Disadvantages
Lowest service life cost High strength Good impact resistance High corrosion resistance Low cost per weight
Low strength
Excellent corrosion
Low impact
resistance
resistance
High strength
Regular maintenance
High impact resistance
to prevent corrosion
Installation and grout filling requires extra care to avoid damage to factory applied coatings. Bollards are supplied as factory standard with a bituminous protective coating suitable for most projects. High performance epoxy or other specified paint systems can be factory applied on request in a choice of colours and thicknesses.
Good cost per weight
Ductile cast iron is the preferred material for all bollard applications. Grey cast iron is cheaper per unit weight, but the need for thicker wall sections and poor impact strength outweigh this. Cast steel remains popular in some countries but needs regular painting to prevent corrosion.
Micro structure
Ductile cast iron (SG)
Grey iron
Wear and abrasion from ropes means paint coatings need regular maintenance. Ductile iron bollards are far less susceptible to corrosion than cast steel bollards, which can rust quickly and will need frequent painting to retain full strength.
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
10–7
BOLLARD SELECTION Displacement
Bollards should be selected and arranged according to local regulations or recognised design standards. The design process should consider:
Mooring pattern(s) Changes in draft due to loading and discharge Wind and current forces Swell, wave and tidal forces Mooring line types, sizes and angles Ice forces (where relevant)
Mooring loads should be calculated where possible, but in the absence of information then the following table can be used as an approximate guideline.
Approx. bollard rating
Up to 2,000 tonnes
10 tonnes
2,000 – 10,000 tonnes
30 tonnes
10,000 – 20,000 tonnes
60 tonnes
20,000 – 50,000 tonnes
80 tonnes
50,000 – 100,000 tonnes
100 tonnes
100,000 – 200,000 tonnes
150 tonnes
over 200,000 tonnes
200 tonnes
Where strong winds, currents or other adverse loads are expected, bollard capacity should be increased by 25% or more.
Mooring line angles
After breast line
Forward breast line
Bollards Spring lines
Head line
Stern line
Mooring line angles are normally calculated as part of a comprehensive mooring simulation. Standards and guidelines such as BS6349 : Part 4, ROM 0.2-90 and PIANC suggest mooring line angles are kept within the limits given in the table below. In some cases much larger line angles can be expected. Trelleborg bollards can cope with horizontal angles of ±90° and vertical angles up to 75°. Please check with your local office about applications where expected line angles exceed those given in the table as these may need additional design checks on anchorages and concrete stresses.
Fully laden case α
Low tide Mean tide High tide
F min
Light draught case α
Suggested Line Angles (BS6349, ROM 0.2-90, PIANC)
F max
Head & stern lines*
45° ±15°
Breast lines*
90° ±30°
Spring lines*
5–10°
Vertical line angle (α)
<30°
* Relative to mooring angle
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Low tide Mean tide High tide
10–8
INSTALLATION Quality assurance Bollards are safety critical items and quality is paramount. A typical quality documentation package will include:
Bollards must be installed correctly for a long and troublefree service life. Anchors should be accurately set out with the supplied template. Bollards can be recessed (as shown) or alternatively surface mounted. Once the grout has reached full strength, anchors can be fully tightened. Mastic is often applied around exposed threads to ease future removal.
Dimensioned drawings of bollard and accessories Bollard and anchorage calculations (if required) Factory inspection report Physical properties report for casting Installation instructions
Codes and guidelines ROM 0.2-90 (1990) Actions in the Design of Maritime and Harbor Works BS6349: Part 4 (1994) Code of Practice for Design of Fendering and Mooring Systems PIANC Report of WG24 (1995) Criteria for Movements of Moored Ships in Harbours – A Practical Guide (1995)
Concrete recess bollard
EAU (1996) Recommendations of the Committee for Waterfront Structures
grout P P D+40 E+40
PIANC Report of PTC II-3 0 (1997) Approach Channels: A Guide for Design (Appendix B – Typical Ship Dimensions) Ministry of Transport, Japan (1999) Technical Note No.911 – Ship Dimensions of Design Ships under given Confidence Limits ROSA – Defenses D’accostage (2000) Recommandations pour Le Calcul Aux Etats-Limitesdes Ouvrages En Site Aquatique defenses D’accostage
* refer to dimensions tables Recessing the bollard is generally recognised as superior to surface mounting. Recessing the base prevents the bollard from working loose on its bolts or cracking the grout bed – especially relevant for high use locations.
PIANC Report of WG33 (2002) Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems (2002)
Fixing options
Embedded
Through
Retrofit (epoxy grouted bolts)
Fuse bolts available on special request.
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
10–9
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PROJECT DETAILS
PROJECT STATUS
Port
TMS Ref:
Project
Preliminary
Designer
Detail design
Contractor
Tender
BOLLARD TYPE
Tee
Horn
Kidney
VESSEL INFORMATION
Overall length (L OA) Displacement (M D) Deadweight (DWT)
Quantity ___________ No.
Quantity ___________ No.
Capacity/SWL _________t
Capacity/SWL _________t
Tee Horn Kidney
Tee Horn Kidney
LOA __________________m
LOA __________________m
MD __________________m
MD __________________m
DWT _________________t
DWT _________________t
Min _______________ deg
Max _______________ deg
Min _______________ deg
Max _______________ deg
LINE ANGLE
MOUNTING
Recessed
OTHER INFORMATION
Surface
Recessed
Recessed
Surface
Surface
FURTHER DETAILS AVAILABLE FROM
Name Position Company Tel Fax Email
M1100-S10-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Quick Release Hooks
Harbour Marine
Docking Aid Systems Environmental Monitoring Section 11
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100- S11-V1.1-EN
11–2
TRELLEBORG HARBOUR MARINE Trelleborg Harbour Marine (THM) has been a leading global manufacturer of advanced docking, mooring and monitoring systems for the oil and gas industries since 1971. The rapid growth in oil and gas terminals and their safety-first philosophy has led to sophisticated systems integration. THM leads the way with a wide range of modular hardware, control and instrumentation solutions that all help to ensure safe berthing and mooring in critical and demanding environments. All systems are extensively tested and proven in practice – the main reason why Trelleborg Harbour Marine is the preferred supplier on most of the world’s latest LNG terminal projects.
Safety First
The Safety Cycle
Every component of every THM module is designed with safety in mind:
Equipment is fully certified for hazardous locations Failsafe designs prevent accidents and unexpected events Operators are kept clear of dangerous zones Early warning and predictive systems reduce risk levels.
Productivity Solutions are tailored for every project:
Better control over vessel approach reduces turnaround times Automation and shared information means more efficient operations Data logging helps optimise and fine-tune procedures Systems easily upgraded or expanded to meet future needs
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–3
INTEGRATED SOLUTIONS Integration is the key to maximum safety and optimum productivity. Trelleborg Harbour Marine solutions can combine the outputs from docking and mooring systems with environmental and forecasting data, fender monitoring and drift warning devices. Local and centrally processed information is then redistributed to virtual consoles, local and remote alarms and to portable receivers on the terminal or ship. Retrofits and upgrades are also available, so even older facilities can benefit from the latest technology, or systems can be added to as needs change. All modules are available for THM and alternative manufacturer hooks and hardware.
Typical Harbour Marine Integrated Solution Hook Bases Load monitoring Remote release hooks
SmartDock® Laser 1
SmartDock® Laser 2 Jetty/Wharf
Alarm Siren
Remote Display Board
Capstan Motor SmartHook®
SmartHook®
Console
SmartHook®
SmartHook®
d a r B o y l a p i s D
Ethernet Switch
Jetty Controller
Operator 1
Harbour Marine PC
Console Interface Program Operator 2
Databases
Remote maintenance dial-up facility
Mooring & Monitoring System (MMS) Mooring Data
Vessel tables
History Data
Docking Data
Report Generator Environmental Report Generator
Local MMS Client GUI
Alarm Server
Tag Definition File
MMS Server(s)
Carry-on Workstation Server
Operator n
Pager Messenger
Environmental Logger
Environmental Server Handheld Server
Environmental Data Log Files
Wave Sensor Interface
Report Printer
Alarm Printer
Carry-on unit laptop
Antenna
Carry-on unit transmitter Temperature Pressure Humidity
Pagers
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Antenna
Pager transmitter
Wind Speed & Direction
Current Sensor Interface
11–4
QUICK RELEASE HOOKS Quick Release Hooks (QRH) enable mooring lines to be quickly and easily released, even under full load conditions. A variety of mounting options exist for the quick release hook. Typically a cast QRH base is used for new installations. To upgrade older facilities, fabricated hook bases can be designed to suit existing hold-down bolt patterns to replace bollards or old QRHs. THM hooks can also be retrofitted to existing bases from other suppliers, considerably reducing on-site civil works.
Hook features Single and multiple hook arrays in sizes to suit all applications Base designs available to suit new, retrofit and upgrade projects Integrated capstans with motors protected within the mounting base Hazardous area certified (where applicable) Hooks can work at large horizontal and vertical angles ‘Fail safe’ release mechanisms are enclosed within the hook body Hooks permit controlled release at all working loads 20kg release lever load complies with health and safety guidelines Counterbalanced hook for easy reset Cast hook profile minimises chafing of mooring lines Low maintenance, durable design is well proven, reliable and refined
Every hook is factory tested and certified to at least 125% of rated load.
Applications LNG carrier berths Oil berths LPG berths Bulk liquids berths
Coal/iron ore berths RoRo terminals Container terminals
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–5
QUICK RELEASE HOOKS Capstans
Manual Release
Capstan motors are fully enclosed within
All hook release components are enclosed within the
the hook base for ultra -low maintenance,
hook side plates, protecting the mechanism from debris
corrosion protection and reliability.
and damage. A 20kg forc e is required to release the
Various load ratings and running
hook at full load whilst a single operator stands safely
speeds are available to suit
behind the hook.
all ship sizes and mooring line
Rope Guards
materials.
Rope guards preventing slack
Hazardous Area Operations
mooring lines from accidentally detaching at high vertical
All electrical
angles.
components
Positive Hook Locking
are certified for hazardous area operations
The fail safe hook
(where required).
mechanism ensures
The hook design
a positive reset
prevents contact
confirmed by easy visual
with the structure
check (with optional remote
during mooring and
verification). This prevents hair-
on release, eliminating
trigger and accidental release
spark risk.
which can occur with inferior designs.
Mounting Bases Single or multiple hook
Counterbalanced Hooks
configurations are available. Bases
The cast mooring hook is
can be cast or fabricated to suit
counterbalanced for easy
new or retrofit installations. Upgrade
reset by operators. The smooth
options include bases to fit existing
Large Mooring Angles
hook profile properly supports
anchor arrays.
Hooks can rotate under full load through
mooring ropes, reducing stress
horizontal angles up to ±90° and vertical
concentrations and chafing.
angles up to 45°. Hinge pins will never freeze and need minimal maintenance.
Upgrades
EasyMoor
Load Monitoring
Remote Release
Calibration Rigs
Remote MLM Displays
Remote Release Console
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–6
QUICK RELEASE HOOKS Single hook
Double hook
C
C
D
D
E
E 90°
90°
ØA ØB
90°
45°
ØA ØB
F
45° 90°
ØI
ØI
G
G J
J
H
H
Triple hook
Quadruple hook
C D
C D
E
90°
90° 45° F
ØA ØB F
45° 45°
E 45°
F 45° 45°
ØA ØB
F 45°
45° 90°
45°
F 45° 90°
ØI ØI G J
G J
H H
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–7
QUICK RELEASE HOOKS Hooks
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Anchors
Quantity
1100 1100 1300 1500
900 900 1100 1300
2060 1945 1980 2150
550 435 370 440
960 960 960 960
– 450 510 450
1218 1218 1218 1218
120 120 120 160
305 305 305 305
480 480 480 480
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
4 5 6 10
1100 1100 1300 1500
900 900 1100 1300
1965 1890 1925 2095
550 435 370 440
905 905 905 905
– 450 510 450
1218 1218 1218 1218
120 120 120 160
305 305 305 305
430 430 430 430
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
4 5 6 10
1100 1100 1300 1500
900 900 1100 1300
1965 1890 1925 2095
550 435 370 440
905 905 905 905
– 450 510 450
1218 1218 1218 1218
120 120 120 160
305 305 305 305
430 430 430 430
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
4 5 6 10
1100 1100 1300 1500
900 900 1100 1300
2085 2010 2045 2200
550 435 370 440
1025 1025 1025 1025
– 450 510 450
1218 1218 1218 1218
120 120 120 160
305 305 305 305
440 440 440 440
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
4 7 10 14
1100 1100 1300 1500
900 900 1100 1300
2070 2000 2035 2205
550 435 370 440
1015 1015 1015 1015
– 450 510 450
1218 1218 1218 1218
120 120 120 160
305 305 305 305
440 440 440 440
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
4 7 10 14
1100 1300 1500 2000
900 1100 1300 1780
2150 2045 2275 2625
575 370 500 600
1025 1025 1025 1025
– 590 590 590
1265 1265 1265 1270
120 120 160 180
305 305 305 305
500 500 490 510
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
4 7 10 14
1100 1300 1500 2000
900 900 1100 1300
2345 2240 2470 2820
575 370 500 600
1220 1220 1220 1220
– 590 590 590
1218 1265 1265 1270
120 120 160 180
305 305 305 305
490 490 480 500
M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000 M56 × 1000
7 10 14 14
45 Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple 60 Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple 75 Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple 100 Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple 125 Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple 150R Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple 150 Series
Single Double Triple Quadruple
The hook series designates the safe working load of each hook (eg. 75 Series hooks have 75t SWL).
[ Units: mm ]
All hooks are tested to their corr esponding proof load. Mounting bases are designed to accept t he combined loads from multiple hooks. Dimensions are typical. Always request a certified hook/base drawing before star ting construction.
Operating envelopes Hook horizontal range Foot switch
Hook vertical range 45°
User operating envelope
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–8
DOCKING AID SYSTEMS SmartDock® is a family of docking aid systems (DAS) used by jetty operators and pilots to monitor the approach of berthing ships. Systems are based on lasers, differential GPS or Real Time Kinematic (RTK) GPS technologies.
SmartDock® Laser SmartDock® Laser uses a pair of laser sensors to measure the distance and angle of a docking ship in the critical range of 200m to 0m from the berthing line. Lasers will function in poor visibility including heavy rain and are eye-safe to the highest FDA Class 1 standard. The data provided to jetty operators, pilots and ship masters is used to prevent over-speed and large angle approaches, allowing early corrections to the manoeuvre long before a potential accident situation arises. SmartDock® Laser can be switched to drift-off when the ship is moored. At a preset distance from the berthing line, alarms are raised on the jetty and ship. On oil and gas jetties this provides added protection for the loading arms.
Features Two jetty mounted laser sensors Jetty controller/interface unit Computer workstation to monitor, display and record data Drift-off warning whilst berthed
Options Handheld monitors Jetty mounted display board showing distance, speed and angle Approach speed green-amber-red warning lights Remote indicator for jetty docking crew
Options and upgrades
Handheld Displays
Jetty Displays
Jetty Indicators
Traffic Lights
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–9
DOCKING AID SYSTEMS
Lasers provide centimetre accuracy in all weathers at ranges up to 200m.
The berthing approach is monitored remotely with early warning alarms.
Data for every berthing is logged for later analysis and training.
SmartDock® GPS SmartDock® GPS offers high precision navigation and berthing. Positional accuracy is better than 60cm using differentially corrected GPS (DGPS). With Real Time Kinematic (RTK) GPS technology, up to 3cm precision is achievable. Vessels are displayed on digital charts that also show superimposed jetty structures. Rate of turn and heading accuracy is better than the ship’s own onboard equipment. The position of other vessels can be integrated with the display using an Automated Information System (AIS) feed.
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Berthing mode
Piloting mode
11–10
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Wind, wave and current forces can significantly affect vessel handling, particularly during low speed manoeuvres. Most larger oil and LNG facilities now require meteorological and oceanographic (MetOcean) sensors to provide this data whilst ships are docking and moored. Data is collected from a variety of MetOcean sensors via cable or telemetry and can be relayed to portable monitors carried by pilots and other remote users.
Weather station Typically located on the roof of the Jetty Control Building, the weather station can log wind speed/direction, barometric pressure, humidity, temperature and rainfall. Visibility sensors are optional.
6 Forecasting services can give advance warning of possible disruptions to operations.
5
0.5 day lead 2 day lead 5 day lead Measured
4 ) m ( t h 3 g i e h e v a W2
1
0 1
5
10
15
20 Day
30
25
Current monitoring Current speed and direction are measured at fixed depths or over the full water column at one or multiple sites along the jetty. It is also common to add remote sensors in turning basins, approach channels and at offshore mooring locations. Wave and tide data Wave height, profile and tide data are provided by a non-contact laser mounted to the jetty. Wave direction can also be measured using immersed sensors or buoys.
Offshore current meter
Side looking current meter
Typical MetOcean virtual display
Non-contact wave height laser
Forecasting Services Real-time forecasting services improve productivity and safety by predicting weather and wave heights to give advance warning of significant events which may hamper berthing, mooring, cargo transfer or departure.
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
11–11
Proven in practice
M1100-S11-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Fender Design
Ship Tables Berthing Modes Coefficients Berth Layout Panel Design Materials Fender Testing Section 12
Trelleborg Marine Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Ref. M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–2
FENDER DESIGN Fenders must reliably protect ships, structures and themselves. They must work every day for many years in severe environments with little or no maintenance. As stated in the British Standard†, fender design should be entrusted to ‘appropriately qualified and experienced people’. Fender engineering requires an understanding of many areas:
Ship technology Civil construction methods Steel fabrications Material properties Installation techniques Health and safety Environmental factors Regulations and codes of practice
Using this guide This guide should assist with many of the frequently asked questions which arise during fender design. All methods described are based on the latest recommendations of PIANC* as well as other internationally recognised codes of practice. Methods are also adapted to working practices within Trelleborg and to suit Trelleborg products. Further design tools and utilities including generic specifications, energy calculation spreadsheets, fender performance curves and much more can be downloaded from the Trelleborg Marine Systems website (www.trelleborg.com/marine).
Exceptions
Codes and guidelines ROM 0.2-90
1990
Actions in the Design of Maritime and Harbor Works
† BS6349 :
Part 4 : 1994
1994
Code of Practice for Design of Fendering and Mooring Systems
EAU 1996
1996
Recommendations of the Committee for Waterfront Structures
These guidelines do not encompass unusual ships, extreme berthing conditions and other extreme cases for which specialist advice should be sought.
PIAN C Bullet in 95
19 97
Approach Channels – A G uide to Desig n Supplement to Bulletin No.95 (1997) PIANC
Japanese MoT 911
1998
Technical Note of the Port and Harbour Research Institute, Ministry of Transport, Japan No. 911, Sept 1998
*PIANC 2002
2002
Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems : 2002 Marcom Report of WG33
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–3
GLOSSARY Commonly used symbols Symbol
B C CB CC CE CM CS D EN EA F L F S H K K C LOA LBP LS LL M M50 M75 MD P R RF V VB α δ θ μ ϕ
Definition
Beam of vessel (excluding beltings and strakes) Positive clearance between hull of vessel and face of structure Block coefficient of vessel’s hull Berth configuration coefficient Eccentricity coefficient Added mass coefficient (virtual mass coefficient) Softness coefficient Draft of vessel Normal berthing energy to be absorbed by fender Abnormal berthing energy to be absorbed by fender Freeboard at laden draft Abnormal impact safety factor Height of compressible part of fender Radius of gyration of vessel Under keel clearance Overall length of vessel’s hull Length of vessel’s hull between perpendiculars Overall length of the smallest vessel using the berth Overall length of the largest vessel using the berth Displacement of the vessel Displacement of the vessel at 50% confidence limit Displacement of the vessel at 75% confidence limit Displacement of vessel Fender pitch or spacing Distance from point of contact to the centre of mass of the vessel Reaction force of fender Velocity of vessel (true vector) Approach velocity of the vessel perpendicular to the berthing line Berthing angle De�ection of the fender unit Hull contact angle with fender Coefficient of friction Velocity vector angle (between R and V)
Units
m m – – – – – m kNm kNm m – m m m m m m m tonne tonne tonne tonne m m kN m/s m/s degree % or m degree – degree
Definitions Rubber fender
Units made from vulcanised rubber (often with encapsulated steel plates) that absorbs energy by elastically deforming in compression, bending or shear or a combination of these effects.
Pneumatic fender Units comprising fabric reinforced rubber bags filled with air under pressure and that absorb energy from the work done in compressing the air above its normal initial pressure. Foam fender
Units comprising a closed cell foam inner core with reinforced polymer outer skin that absorb energy by virtue of the work done in compressing the foam.
Steel Panel
A structural steel frame designed to distribute the forces generated during rubber fender compression.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–4
WHY FENDER? ‘There is a simple reason to use fenders: it is just too expensive not to do so’. These are the opening remarks of PIANC* and remain the primary reason why every modern port invests in protecting their structures with fenders. Well-designed fender systems will reduce construction costs and will contribute to making the berth more efficient by improving turn-around times. It follows that the longer a fender system lasts and the less maintenance it needs, the better the investment. It is rare for the very cheapest fenders to offer the lowest long term cost. Quite the opposite is true. A small initial saving will often demand much greater investment in repairs and upkeep over the years. A cheap fender system can cost many times that of a well-engineered, higher quality solution over the lifetime of the berth as the graphs below demonstrate.
10 reasons for quality fendering
Capital costs
Maintenance costs 700
180 160
600
s t s o c r e h t O
140 120
r e h t O
500
400
100 80
COST SAVING
300
e c i r p e s a h c r u P
60 40 20 0
Safety of staff, ships and structures Much lower lifecycle costs Rapid, trouble-free installation Quicker turnaround time, greater efficiency Reduced maintenance and repair Berths in more exposed locations Better ship stability when moored Lower structural loads Accommodate more ship types and sizes More satisfied customers
Trelleborg
200
o r g T r e l l e b
100
Other
0
10
20 30 Service life (years)
40
Purchase price + Design approvals + Delivery delays + Installation time + Site support
Wear & tear + Replacements + Damage repairs + Removal & scrapping + Fatigue, corrosion
= Capital cost
= Maintenance cost
50
Capital cost + Maintenance cost = FULL LIFE COST
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–5
DESIGN FLOWCHART Functional
type(s) of cargo safe berthing and mooring
better stability on berth reduction of reaction force
Operational
berthing procedures frequency of berthing limits of mooring and operations (adverse weather) range of vessel sizes, types special features of vessels (�are, beltings, list, etc) allowable hull pressures
light, laden or partly laden ships stand-off from face of structure (crane reach) fender spacing type and orientation of waterfront structure special requirements spares availability
Site conditions
wind speed wave height current speed
topography tidal range swell and fetch
temperature corrosivity channel depth
Design criteria
codes and standards design vessels for calculations normal/abnormal v elocity maximum reaction force friction coefficient desired service life
safety factors (normal/abnormal) maintenance cost/frequency installation cost/practicality chemical pollution accident response
Design criteria
Calculation of berthing energy
Mooring layout
CM virtual mass factor CE eccentricity factor
CC berth configuration factor CS softness factor
Calculation of fender energy absorption
location of mooring equipment and/or dolphins
strength and type of mooring lines
pre-tensioning of mooring lines
Assume fender system and type
selection of abnormal berthing safety factor
Computer simulation (first series) Selection of appropriate fenders Check results Determination of:
energy absorption reaction force de�ection
environmental factors angular compression hull pressure
frictional loads chains etc
Check impact on structure and vessel
horizontal and vertical loading chance of hitting the structure (bulbous bows etc) face of structure to accommodate fender
check vessel motions in six degrees of freedom check vessel acceleration
Final selection of fender
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
determine main characteristics of fender PIANC Type Approved verification test methods
check de�ection, energy and reaction force check mooring line forces
Computer simulation (optimisation)
implications of installing the fender bevels/snagging from hull protrusions restraint chains
check availability of fender track record and warranties future spares availability fatigue/durability tests
12–6
THE DESIGN PROCESS Many factors contribute to the design of a fender:
Ships Ship design evolves constantly – shapes change and many vessel types are getting larger. Fenders must suit current ships and those expected to arrive in the foreseeable future.
Structures Fenders impose loads on the berthing structure. Many berths are being built in exposed locations, where fenders can play a crucial role in the overall cost of construction. Local practice, materials and conditions may in�uence the choice of fender.
Berthing Many factors will affect how vessels approach the berth, the corresponding kinetic energy and the load applied to the structure. Berthing modes may affect the choice of ship speed and the safety factor for abnormal conditions.
Installation and maintenance Fender installation should be considered early in the design process. Accessibility for maintenance, wear allowances and the protective coatings will all affect the full life cost of systems. The right fender choice can improve turnaround times and reduce downtime. The safety of personnel, structures and vessels must be considered at every stage – before, during and after commissioning.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–7
ENVIRONMENT Typical berthing locations Berthing structures are located in a variety of places from sheltered basins to unprotected, open waters. Local conditions will play a large part in deciding the berthing speeds and approach angles, in turn affecting the type and size of suitable fenders.
Non-tidal basins With minor changes in water level, these locations are usually sheltered from strong winds, waves and currents. Ship sizes may be restricted due to lock access.
Tidal basins Larger variations in water level (depends on location) but still generally sheltered from winds, waves and currents. May be used by larger vessels than non-tidal basins.
Coastal berths Maximum exposure to winds, waves and currents. Berths generally used by single classes of vessel such as oil, gas or bulk.
Tides Tides vary by area and may have extremes of a few centimetres (Mediterranean, Baltic) or over 15 metres (parts of UK and Canada). Tides will in�uence the structure’s design and fender selection.
River berths Largest tidal r ange (depends on site), with greater exposure to winds, waves and currents. Approach mode may be restricted by dredged channels and by �ood and ebb tides. Structures on river bends may complicate berthing manoeuvres.
HRT HAT MHWS MHWN
MSL MLWN
HRT
Highest Recorded Tide
MLWS
HAT
Highest Astronomical Tide
LAT
MHWS
Mean High Water Spring
LRT
MHWN
Mean High Water Neap
MLWN
Mean Low Water Neap
MLWS
Mean Low Water Spring
LAT
Lowest Astronomical Tide
LRT
Lowest Recorded Tide
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Currents and winds Current and wind forces can push vessels onto or off the berth, and may in�uence the berthing speed. Once berthed, and provided the vessel contacts several fenders, the forces are usually less critical. However special cases do exist, especially on very soft structures. As a general guide, deep draught vessels (such as tankers) will be more affected by current and high freeboard vessels (such as RoRo and container ships) will be more affected by strong winds.
12–8
STRUCTURES The preferred jetty structure can in�uence the fender design and vice versa. The type of structure depends on local practice, the geology at the site, available materials and other factors. Selecting an appropriate fender at an early stage can have a major effect on the overall project cost. Below are some typical structures and fender design considerations.
Features Open pile jetties
Dolphins
Monopiles
Mass structures
Sheet piles
Simple and cost-effective
Good for deeper waters
Load-sensitive
Limited fixing area for fenders
Vulnerable to bulbous bows
Design considerations
Low reaction reduces pile sizes and concrete mass
Best to keep fixings above piles and low tide
Suits cantilever panel designs
Common for oil and gas terminals
Few but large fenders
Very load-sensitive
Total reliability needed
Flexible structures need careful design to match fender loads
Low reactions preferred
Large panels for low hull pressures need chains etc
Fenders should be designed for fast installation
Restricted access means low maintenance fenders
Low reactions must be matched to structure
Parallel motion systems
Structural repairs are costly
Inexpensive structures
Loads are critical
Not suitable for all geologies
Suits remote locations
Quick to construct
Most common in areas with small tides
Keep anchors above low tide
Fender reaction not critical
Avoid fixings spanning pre-cast and in situ sections or expansion joints
Care needed selecting fender spacing and projection
Suits cast-in or retrofit anchors
Many options for fender types
Fixing fenders direct to piles difficult due to build tolerances
Keep anchors above low tide
Care needed selecting fender spacing and projection
Quick to construct
Mostly used in low corrosion regions
In situ concrete copes are common
Can suffer from ALWC (accelerated low water corrosion)
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–9
SHIP TYPES General cargo ship
Prefer small gaps between ship and quay to minimise outreach of cranes. Large change of draft between laden and empty conditions. May occupy berths for long periods. Coastal cargo vessels may berth without tug assistance.
Bulk carrier
Container ship
Need to be close to berth face to minimise shiploader outreach. Possible need to warp ships along berth for shiploader to change holds. Large change of draft between laden and empty conditions. Require low hull contact pressures unless belted.
Flared bows are prone to strike shore structures. Increasing ship beams needs increase crane outreach. Some vessels have single or multiple beltings. Bulbous bows may strike front piles of structures at large berthing angles. Require low hull contact pressures unless belted.
Oil tanker
RoRo ship
Need to avoid fire hazards from sparks or friction. Large change of draft between laden and empty conditions. Require low hull contact pressures. Coastal tankers may berth without tug assistance.
Ships have own loading ramps – usually stern, slewed or side doors. High lateral and/or transverse berthing speeds. Manoeuvrability at low speeds may be poor. End berthing impacts often occur. Many different shapes, sizes and condition of beltings.
Passenger (cruise) ship
Ferry
Gas carrier
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
Small draft change between laden and empty. White or light coloured hulls are easily marked. Flared bows are prone to strike shore structures. Require low hull contact pressures unless belted.
Quick turn around needed. High berthing speeds, often with end berthing. Intensive use of berth. Berthing without tug assistance. Many different shapes, sizes and condition of beltings.
Need to avoid fire hazards from sparks or friction. Shallow draft even at full load. Require low hull contact pressures. Single class of vessels using dedicated facilities. Manifolds not necessarily at midships position.
12–10
SHIP FEATURES
Bow �ares
Common on container vessels and cruise ships. Big �are angles may affect fender performance. Larger fender may be required to maintain clearance from the quay structure, cranes, etc.
Bulbous bows
Most modern ships have bulbous bows. Care is needed at large berthing angles or with widely spaced fenders to ensure the bulbous bow does not catch behind the fender or hit structural piles.
Beltings & strakes
Almost every class of ship could be fitted with beltings or strakes. They are most common on RoRo ships or ferries, but may even appear on container ships or gas carriers. Tugs and offshore supply boats have very large beltings.
Flying bridge
Cruise and RoRo ships often have �ying bridges. In locks, or when tides are large, care is needed to avoid the bridge sitting on top of the fender during a falling tide.
Low freeboard
Barges, small tankers and general cargo ships can have a small freeboard. Fenders should extend down so that vessels cannot catch underneath at low tides and when fully laden.
Stern & side doors
RoRo ships, car carriers and some navy vessels have large doors for vehicle access. These are often recessed and can snag fenders – especially in locks or when warping along the berth.
High freeboard
Ships with high freeboard include ferries, cruise and container ships, as well as many lightly loaded vessels. Strong winds can cause sudden, large increases in berthing speeds.
Low hull pressure
Many modern ships, but especially tankers and gas carriers, require very low hull contact pressures, which are achieved using large fender panels or �oating fenders.
Aluminium hulls
High speed catamarans and monohulls are often built from aluminium. They can only accept loads from fenders at special positions: usually reinforced beltings set very low or many metres above the waterline.
Special features
Many ships are modified during their lifetime with little regard to the effect these changes may have on berthing or fenders. Protrusions can snag fenders but risks are reduced by large bevels and chamfers on the frontal panels.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–11
BERTHING MODES Side berthing
α
Typical values
ϕ
0° ≤ α ≤ 15° 100mm/s ≤ V ≤ 300mm/s
V
60° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°
Dolphin berthing
Tug
α
Typical values
0° ≤ α ≤ 10°
ϕ
100mm/s ≤ V ≤ 200mm/s 30° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°
V End berthing
α
Typical values
ϕ
0° ≤ α ≤ 10°
V
200mm/s ≤ V ≤ 500mm/s 0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 10°
Lock entrances
V
Typical values
ϕ
0° ≤ α ≤ 30° 300mm/s ≤ V ≤ 2000mm/s
α
0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 30° Ship-to-ship berthing
Typical values
ϕ
α
0° ≤ α ≤ 15° 150mm/s ≤ V ≤ 500mm/s
V
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
60° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°
12–12
BERTHING ENERGY The kinetic energy of a berthing ship needs to be absorbed by a suitable fender system and this is most commonly carried out using well recognised deterministic methods as outlined in the following sections.
Normal Berthing Energy (EN) Most berthings will have energy less than or equal to the normal berthing energy (E N). The calculation should take into account worst combinations of vessel displacement, velocity, angle as well as the various coefficients. Allowance should also be made for how often the berth is used, any tidal restrictions, experience of the operators, berth type, wind and current exposure. The normal energy to be absorbed by the fender can be calculated as:
EN = 0.5 × M × VB� × CM × CE × CC × CS Where, EN = Normal berthing energy to be absorbed by the fender (kNm) M = Mass of the vessel (displacement in tonne) at chosen confidence level.* VB = Approach velocity component perpendicular to the berthing line † (m/s). CM = Added mass coefficient CE = Eccentricity coefficient CC = Berth configuration coefficient CS = Softness coefficient * PIANC suggests 50% or 75% confidence limits (M 50 or M75) are appropriate to most cases. † Berthing velocity (VB) is usually based on displacement at 50% confidence limit (M 50).
Abnormal Berthing Energy (EA) Abnormal impacts arise when the normal energy is exceeded. Causes may include human error, malfunctions, exceptional weather conditions or a combination of these factors. The abnormal energy to be absorbed by the fender can be calculated as:
EA = F S × EN
PIANC Factors of Safety (F S) Vessel type
Size
Tanker, bulk, cargo
Largest Smallest
1.25 1.75
Container
Largest Smallest
1.5 2.0
General cargo
Where, EA = Abnormal berthing energy to be absorbed by the fender (kNm) F S = Safety factor for abnormal berthings Choosing a suitable safety factor (F S) will depend on many factors:
The consequences a fender failure may have on ber th operations. How frequently the berth is used. Very low design berthing speeds which might easily be exceeded. Vulnerability to damage of the supporting structure. Range of vessel sizes and types using the berth. Hazardous or valuable cargoes including people.
FS
1.75
RoRo, ferries
≥ 2.0
Tugs, workboats, etc
2.0
Source: PIANC 2002; Table 4.2.5. PIANC recommends that ‘the factor of abnormal impact when derived should be not be less than 1.1 nor more than 2.0 unless exception circumstances prevail’. Source: PIANC 2002; Section 4.2.8.5.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–13
SHIP DEFINITIONS Many different definitions are used to describe ship sizes and classes. Some of the more common descriptions are given below. Length × Beam × Draft
Vessel Type
Small feeder
200m × 23m × 9m
Fe e d e r
215m × 30m × 10m
Panamax 1
290m × 32.3m × 12m
Post- Panamax
305m × >32.3m × 13m
DWT
Comments
1st Generation container <1,000 teu 2nd Generation container 1,000–2,500 teu 3rd Generation container 2,500–5,000 teu 4th Generation container 5,000–8,000 teu 5th Generation container >8,000 teu All vessel t ypes in Suez Canal
Super post-Panamax (VLCS) Suezmax 2
50 0m × 70m × 21.3m
Seaway-Max
233.5m × 24.0m × 9.1m
3
All vessel types in St L awrence Seaway
Handysize
10,000 – 40,000 dw t
Bulk carrier
Cape Size
130,000 –200,000 dw t
Bulk carrier
Ver y large bulk carrier ( VLBC)
>200,000 dw t
Bulk carrier
Ver y large crude carrier ( VLCC)
200,000 – 300,000 dw t
Oil tanker
Ultr a lar ge crude carrier (ULCC)
>300,000 dw t
Oil tanker
1. Panama Canal
2. Suez Canal
3. St Lawrence Seaway
Lock chambers are 305m long and 33.5m wide. The largest depth of the canal is 12.5 –13.7 –13.7m. m. The canal is about 86km long and passage takes eight hours.
The canal, connecting the Mediterranean and Red Sea, is about 163km long and varies from 80–135m wide. It has no lock chambers but most of the canal has a single traffic lane with passing bays.
The seaway system allows ships to pass from the Atlantic Ocean to the Great Lakes via six shor t canals totalling 110km, with 19 locks, each 233m long, 24.4m wide and 9.1m deep.
The ship tables show laden draft (D L) of vessels. The draft of a partly loaded ship (D) can be estimated using the formula below: LWT
MD = LWT + DWT
+
DWT
= MD
D≈
DL × LWT MD
=
D
DL × (MD – DWT) MD
DL
USING SHIP TABLES 5 0%
75%
Ship tables originally appeared in PIANC 2002. They are divided into Confidence Limits (CL) which are defined as the propor tion of ships of the same DWT with dimensions equal to or less than those in the t able. PIANC considers 50% to 75% confidence limits are the most appropriate for design. Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for supplementary tables of latest and largest vessel types including Container, Container, RoRo, Cruise and LNG.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–14
50%
SHIP TABLES smaller
larger
Wind area Type
General cargo ship
Bulk carrier
Container ship
Oil tanker
DWT/GRT
Displacement M50
LOA
LBP
B
FL
DL
Lateral Full Load
Front
Ballast
Full Load
Ballast
1000
1580
63
58
10.3
1.6
3.6
227
292
59
88
2000
3040
78
72
12.4
1.9
4.5
348
463
94
134
3000
4460
88
82
13.9
2.1
5.1
447
605
123
172
5000
7210
104
96
16.0
2.3
6.1
612
849
173
236
7000
9900
115
107
17.6
2.5
6.8
754
1060
216
290
10 10000
13900
128
120
19.5
2.7
7.6
940
1340
274
361
15 15000
20300
146
136
21.8
3.0
8.7
1210
1760
359
463
20 20000
26600
159
149
23.6
3.1
9.6
1440
2130
435
552
30 30000
39000
181
170
26.4
3.5
10.9
1850
2780
569
709
40 40000
51100
197
186
28.6
3.7
12.0
2210
3370
690
846
5000
6740
106
98
15.0
2.3
6.1
615
850
205
231
7000
9270
116
108
16.6
2.6
6.7
710
1010
232
271
10 10000
13000
129
120
18.5
2.9
7.5
830
1230
264
320
15 15000
19100
145
135
21.0
3.3
8.4
980
1520
307
387
20 20000
25000
157
148
23.0
3.6
9.2
1110
1770
341
443
30 30000
36700
176
167
26.1
4.1
10.3
1320
2190
397
536
50 50000
59600
204
194
32.3
4.8
12.0
1640
2870
479
682
70 70000
81900
224
215
32.3
5.3
13.3
1890
3440
542
798
100000
115000
248
239
37.9
5.9
14.8
2200
4150
619
940
150000
168000
279
270
43.0
6.6
16.7
2610
5140
719
1140
200000
221000
303
294
47.0
7.2
18.2
2950
5990
800
1310
250000
273000
322
314
50.4
7.8
19.4
3240
6740
868
1450
7000
10200
116
108
19.6
2.4
6.9
1320
1360
300
396
10 10000
14300
134
125
21.6
3.0
7.7
1690
1700
373
477
15 15000
21100
157
147
24.1
3.9
8.7
2250
2190
478
591
20 20000
27800
176
165
26.1
4.6
9.5
2750
2620
569
687
25 25000
34300
192
180
27.7
5.2
10.2
3220
3010
652
770
30 30000
40800
206
194
29.1
5.8
10.7
3660
3370
729
850
40 40000
53700
231
218
32.3
6.8
11.7
4480
4040
870
990
50 50000
66500
252
238
32.3
7.7
12.5
5230
4640
990
1110
60000
79100
271
256
35.2
8.5
13.2
5950
5200
1110
1220
1000
1450
59
54
9.7
0.5
3.8
170
266
78
80
2000
2810
73
68
12.1
0.7
4.7
251
401
108
117
3000
4140
83
77
13.7
1.0
5.3
315
509
131
146
5000
6740
97
91
16.0
1.4
6.1
419
689
167
194
7000
9300
108
102
17.8
1.7
6.7
505
841
196
233
10 10000
13100
121
114
19.9
2.0
7.5
617
1040
232
284
15 15000
19200
138
130
22.5
2.6
8.4
770
1320
281
355
20 20000
25300
151
143
24.6
3.1
9.1
910
1560
322
416
30 30000
37300
171
163
27.9
3.7
10.3
1140
1990
390
520
50 50000
60800
201
192
32.3
4.9
11.9
1510
2690
497
689
70 70000
83900
224
214
36.3
5.7
13.2
1830
3280
583
829
100000
118000
250
240
40.6
6.8
14.6
2230
4050
690
1010
150000
174000
284
273
46.0
8.3
16.4
2800
5150
840
1260
200000
229000
311
300
50.3
9.4
17.9
3290
6110
960
1480
300000
337000
354
342
57.0
11.4
20.1
4120
7770
1160
1850
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–15
50%
SHIP TABLES smaller
larger
Type
RoRo ship
Passenger (cruise) ship
Ferry
Gas carrier
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
DWT/GRT
Displacement M50
LOA
LBP
B
FL
DL
Wind area Lateral Front Full Load Ballast Full Load Ballast
1000
1970
66
60
13.2
2.0
3.2
700
810
216
217
2000
3730
85
78
15.6
2.9
4.1
970
1110
292
301
3000
5430
99
90
17.2
3.6
4.8
1170
1340
348
364
5000
8710
119
109
19.5
4.7
5.8
1480
1690
435
464
7000
11900
135
123
21.2
5.5
6.6
1730
1970
503
544
10 10000
16500
153
141
23.1
6.7
7.5
2040
2320
587
643
15 15000
24000
178
163
25.6
8.2
8.7
2460
2790
701
779
20 20000
31300
198
182
27.4
9.5
9.7
2810
3180
794
890
30000
45600
229
211
30.3
11.7
11.3
3400
3820
950
1080
1000
850
60
54
11.4
2.2
1.9
426
452
167
175
2000
1580
76
68
13.6
2.8
2.5
683
717
225
234
3000
2270
87
78
15.1
3.2
3.0
900
940
267
277
5000
3580
104
92
17.1
3.9
3.6
1270
1320
332
344
7000
4830
117
103
18.6
4.5
4.1
1600
1650
383
396
10 10000
6640
133
116
20.4
5.0
4.8
2040
2090
446
459
15 15000
9530
153
132
22.5
5.9
5.6
2690
2740
530
545
20 20000
12300
169
146
24.2
5.2
7.6
3270
3320
599
614
30 30000
17700
194
166
26.8
7.3
7.6
4310
4350
712
728
50 50000
27900
231
197
30.5
10.6
7.6
6090
6120
880
900
70000
37600
260
220
33.1
13.1
7.6
7660
7660
1020
1040
1000
810
59
54
12.7
1.9
2.7
387
404
141
145
2000
1600
76
69
15.1
2.5
3.3
617
646
196
203
3000
2390
88
80
16.7
2.8
3.7
811
851
237
247
5000
3940
106
97
19.0
3.3
4.3
1150
1200
302
316
7000
5480
119
110
20.6
3.7
4.8
1440
1510
354
372
10 10000
7770
135
125
22.6
4.2
5.3
1830
1930
419
442
15 15000
11600
157
145
25.0
4.7
6.0
2400
2540
508
537
20 20000
15300
174
162
26.8
5.2
6.5
2920
3090
582
618
30 30000
22800
201
188
29.7
5.9
7.4
3830
4070
705
752
40 40000
30300
223
209
31.9
6.5
8.0
4660
4940
810
860
1000
2210
68
63
11.1
1.0
4.3
350
436
121
139
2000
4080
84
78
13.7
1.6
5.2
535
662
177
203
3000
5830
95
89
15.4
2.0
5.8
686
846
222
254
5000
9100
112
104
17.9
2.7
6.7
940
1150
295
335
7000
12300
124
116
19.8
3.2
7.4
1150
1410
355
403
10 10000
16900
138
130
22.0
3.8
8.2
1430
1750
432
490
15 15000
24100
157
147
24.8
4.6
9.3
1840
2240
541
612
20 20000
31100
171
161
27.1
5.4
10.0
2190
2660
634
716
30 30000
44400
194
183
30.5
6.1
11.7
2810
3400
794
894
50000
69700
227
216
35.5
9.6
11.7
3850
4630
1050
1180
70000
94000
252
240
39.3
12.3
11.7
4730
5670
1270
1420
100000
128000
282
268
43.7
15.6
11.7
5880
7030
1550
1730
12–16
75%
SHIP TABLES smaller
larger
Wind area Type
General cargo ship
Bulk carrier
Container ship
Oil tanker
DWT/GRT
Displacement M75
LOA
LBP
B
FL
DL
Lateral Full Load
Front
Ballast
Full Load
Ballast
1000
1690
67
62
10.8
1.9
3.9
278
342
63
93
2000
3250
83
77
13.1
2.3
4.9
426
541
101
142
3000
4750
95
88
14.7
2.5
5.6
547
708
132
182
5000
7690
111
104
16.9
2.8
6.6
750
993
185
249
7000
10600
123
115
18.6
3.0
7.4
922
1240
232
307
10 10000
14800
137
129
20.5
3.3
8.3
1150
1570
294
382
15 15000
21600
156
147
23.0
3.6
9.5
1480
2060
385
490
20 20000
28400
170
161
24.9
3.9
10.4
1760
2490
466
585
30 30000
41600
193
183
27.8
4.3
11.9
2260
3250
611
750
40 40000
54500
211
200
30.2
4.6
13.0
2700
3940
740
895
5000
6920
109
101
15.5
2.4
6.2
689
910
221
245
7000
9520
120
111
17.2
2.6
6.9
795
1090
250
287
10 10000
13300
132
124
19.2
2.9
7.7
930
1320
286
340
15 15000
19600
149
140
21.8
3.3
8.6
1100
1630
332
411
20 20000
25700
161
152
23.8
3.6
9.4
1240
1900
369
470
30 30000
37700
181
172
27.0
4.1
10.6
1480
2360
428
569
50 50000
61100
209
200
32.3
4.7
12.4
1830
3090
518
723
70 70000
84000
231
221
32.3
5.2
13.7
2110
3690
586
846
100000
118000
255
246
39.2
5.9
15.2
2460
4460
669
1000
150000
173000
287
278
44.5
6.7
17.1
2920
5520
777
1210
200000
227000
311
303
48.7
7.3
18.6
3300
6430
864
1380
250000
280000
332
324
52.2
7.8
19.9
3630
7240
938
1540
7000
10700
123
115
20.3
2.6
7.2
1460
1590
330
444
10 10000
15100
141
132
22.4
3.3
8.0
1880
1990
410
535
15 15000
22200
166
156
25.0
4.3
9.0
2490
2560
524
663
20 20000
29200
186
175
27.1
5.0
9.9
3050
3070
625
771
25 25000
36100
203
191
28.8
5.7
10.6
3570
3520
716
870
30 30000
43000
218
205
30.2
6.4
11.1
4060
3950
800
950
40 40000
56500
244
231
32.3
7.4
12.2
4970
4730
950
1110
50000
69900
266
252
32.3
8.4
13.0
5810
5430
1090
1250
60000
83200
286
271
36.5
9.2
13.8
6610
6090
1220
1370
1000
1580
61
58
10.2
0.5
4.0
190
280
86
85
2000
3070
76
72
12.6
0.8
4.9
280
422
119
125
3000
4520
87
82
14.3
1.1
5.5
351
536
144
156
5000
7360
102
97
16.8
1.5
6.4
467
726
184
207
7000
10200
114
108
18.6
1.8
7.1
564
885
216
249
10 10000
14300
127
121
20.8
2.1
7.9
688
1090
255
303
15 15000
21000
144
138
23.6
2.7
8.9
860
1390
309
378
20 20000
27700
158
151
25.8
3.2
9.6
1010
1650
355
443
30 30000
40800
180
173
29.2
3.9
10.9
1270
2090
430
554
50 50000
66400
211
204
32.3
5.0
12.6
1690
2830
548
734
70 70000
91600
235
227
38.0
6.0
13.9
2040
3460
642
884
100000
129000
263
254
42.5
7.1
15.4
2490
4270
761
1080
150000
190000
298
290
48.1
8.5
17.4
3120
5430
920
1340
200000
250000
327
318
42.6
9.8
18.9
3670
6430
1060
1570
300000
368000
371
363
59.7
11.9
21.2
4600
8180
1280
1970
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–17
75%
SHIP TABLES smaller
larger
Type
RoRo ship
Passenger (cruise) ship
Ferry
Gas carrier
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
DWT/GRT
Displacement M75
LOA
LBP
B
FL
DL
Wind area Lateral Front Full Load Ballast Full Load Ballast
1000
2190
73
66
14.0
2.7
3.5
880
970
232
232
2000
4150
94
86
16.6
3.9
4.5
1210
1320
314
323
3000
6030
109
99
18.3
4.7
5.3
1460
1590
374
391
5000
9670
131
120
20.7
6.1
6.4
1850
2010
467
497
7000
13200
148
136
22.5
7.3
7.2
2170
2350
541
583
10000
18300
169
155
24.6
8.8
8.2
2560
2760
632
690
15000
26700
196
180
27.2
10.7
9.6
3090
3320
754
836
20000
34800
218
201
29.1
12.4
10.7
3530
3780
854
960
30000
50600
252
233
32.2
15.2
12.4
4260
4550
1020
1160
1000
1030
64
60
12.1
2.3
2.6
464
486
187
197
2000
1910
81
75
14.4
2.9
3.4
744
770
251
263
3000
2740
93
86
16.0
3.4
4.0
980
1010
298
311
5000
4320
112
102
18.2
4.2
4.8
1390
1420
371
386
7000
5830
125
114
19.8
4.7
5.5
1740
1780
428
444
10000
8010
142
128
21.6
5.3
6.4
2220
2250
498
516
15000
11500
163
146
23.9
6.2
7.5
2930
2950
592
611
20000
14900
180
160
25.7
7.3
8.0
3560
3570
669
690
30000
21300
207
183
28.4
9.8
8.0
4690
4680
795
818
50000
33600
248
217
32.3
13.7
8.0
6640
6580
990
1010
70000
45300
278
243
35.2
16.6
8.0
8350
8230
1140
1170
1000
1230
67
61
14.3
2.1
3.4
411
428
154
158
2000
2430
86
78
17.0
2.6
4.2
656
685
214
221
3000
3620
99
91
18.8
2.9
4.8
862
903
259
269
5000
5970
119
110
21.4
3.5
5.5
1220
1280
330
344
7000
8310
134
124
23.2
3.9
6.1
1530
1600
387
405
10000
11800
153
142
25.4
4.3
6.8
1940
2040
458
482
15000
17500
177
164
28.1
5.0
7.6
2550
2690
555
586
20000
23300
196
183
30.2
5.5
8.3
3100
3270
636
673
30000
34600
227
212
33.4
6.2
9.4
4070
4310
771
819
40000
45900
252
236
35.9
6.9
10.2
4950
5240
880
940
1000
2480
71
66
11.7
1.1
4.6
390
465
133
150
2000
4560
88
82
14.3
1.5
5.7
597
707
195
219
3000
6530
100
93
16.1
2.0
6.4
765
903
244
273
5000
10200
117
109
18.8
2.6
7.4
1050
1230
323
361
7000
13800
129
121
20.8
3.2
8.1
1290
1510
389
434
10000
18900
144
136
23.1
3.9
9.0
1600
1870
474
527
15000
27000
164
154
26.0
4.8
10.1
2050
2390
593
658
20000
34800
179
169
28.4
5.5
11.0
2450
2840
696
770
30000
49700
203
192
32.0
6.7
12.3
3140
3630
870
961
50000
78000
237
226
37.2
10.5
12.3
4290
4940
1150
1270
70000
105000
263
251
41.2
13.4
12.3
5270
6050
1390
1530
100000
144000
294
281
45.8
16.9
12.3
6560
7510
1690
1860
12–18
APPROACH VELOCITY (VB) Berthing speeds depend on the ease or difficulty of the approach, the exposure of the berth and the vessel’s size. Conditions are normally divided into five categories as shown in the chart’s key table. The most widely used guide to approach speeds is the Brolsma table, adopted by BS 1, PIANC 2 and other standards. For ease of use, speeds for the main vessel sizes are shown at the bottom of this page.
0.8 Berthing condition
a b c d e
0.7
VB
e ) 0.6 s / m ( B V , 0.5 y t i c o l e v h 0.4 c a o r p p A 0.3
Easy berthing, sheltered Difficult berthing, sheltered Easy berthing, exposed Good berthing, exposed Difficult berthing, exposed
d
c most commonly used conditions b
0.2 a 0.1 USE WITH CAUTION 0 1,000
10,000
100,000
500,000
Deadweight (DWT)* * PIANC suggests using DW T from 50% or 75% confidence limit ship tables.
Velocity, VB (m/s)
Approach velocities less than
DWT
a
b
c
d
e
1,000
0.179
0.343
0.517
0.669
0.865
2,000
0.151
0.296
0.445
0.577
0.726
3,000
0.136
0.269
0.404
0.524
0.649
4,000
0.125
0.250
0.374
0.487
0.597
5,000
0.117
0.236
0.352
0.459
0.558
10,000
0.094
0.192
0.287
0.377
0.448
20,000
0.074
0.153
0.228
0.303
0.355
30,000
0.064
0.133
0.198
0.264
0.308
40,000
0.057
0.119
0.178
0.239
0.279
measured, displayed and recorded
50,000
0.052
0.110
0.164
0.221
0.258
using a SmartDock Docking Aid
100,000
0.039
0.083
0.126
0.171
0.201
System (DAS) by Harbour Marine.†
200,000
0.028
0.062
0.095
0.131
0.158
300,000
0.022
0.052
0.080
0.111
0.137
400,000
0.019
0.045
0.071
0.099
0.124
500,000
0.017
0.041
0.064
0.090
0.115
0.1m/s should be used with caution.
Values are for tug-assisted berthing.
Spreadsheets for calculating the approach velocity and berthing energy are available at www.trelleborg.com/marine .
Actual berthing velocities can be
† Harbour
Marine is part of
Trelleborg Marine Systems.
Caution: low berthing speeds are easily exceeded.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–19
BLOCK COEFFICIENT (CB) The block coefficient (CB) is a function of the hull shape and is expressed as follows:
CB =
Typical block coefficients (C B)
MD
Container vessels
LBP × B × D × ρ SW
0.6–0.8
General cargo and bulk carriers
where, MD = displacement of vessel (t) LBP = length between perpendiculars (m) B = beam (m) D = draft (m) ρSW = seawater density ≈ 1.025t/m 3
0.72–0.85
Tankers
0.85
Ferries
0.55–0.65
RoRo vessels
0.7–0.8
Source: PIANC 2002; Table 4.2.2
Given ship dimensions and using typical block coefficients, the displacement can be estimated:
LBP
D
B
MD ≈ CB × LBP × B × D × ρSW
ADDED MASS COEFFICIENT (CM) B
The added mass coefficient allows for the body of water carried along with the ship as it moves sideways through the water. As the ship is stopped by the fender, the entrained water continues to push against the ship, effectively increasing its overall mass. The Vasco Costa method is adopted by most design codes for ship-to-shore berthing where water depths are not substantially greater than vessel drafts. Shigera Ueda (1981)
PIANC (2002)
for
K C D
≤ 0.1
for 0.1 ≤
for
K C D
K C D
≥ 0.5
Quay
VB
K C
Vasco Costa* (1964)
CM = 1.8
≤ 0.5
K C
CM = 1.875 – 0.75
D
CM = 1.5
CM =
π × D 2 × CB × B
CM = 1 +
2D B
where, D = draft of vessel (m) B = beam of vessel (m) LBP = length between perpendiculars (m) K C = under keel clearance (m)
* valid where V B ≥ 0.08m/s, K C ≥ 0.1D
Special case – longitudinal approach
V
12–19
D
CM = 1.1 Recommended by PIANC.
12–20
ECCENTRICITY COEFFICIENT (CE) The Eccentricity Coefficient allows for the energy dissipated by rotation of the ship about its point of impact with the fenders. The correct point of impact, berthing angle and velocity vector angle are all important for accurate calculation of the eccentricity coefficient. In practice, CE often varies between 0.3 and 1.0 for different berthing cases. Velocity (V) is not always perpendicular to the berthing line.
LBP y
x
B 2
ϕ
R
α
berthing line VB
V VL
VL = longitudinal velocity component (forward or astern)
x+y=
R=
LBP
(assuming the centre of mass is at mid-length of the ship)
2
y � +
B
Common berthing cases
2
2 Quarter-point berthing
K = (0.19 × CB + 0.11) × LBP x=
CE =
LBP
CE ≈ 0.4–0.6
4
K 2 + R2cos2ϕ Third-point berthing
K 2 + R2
x=
where, B = beam (m) CB = block coefficient LBP = length between perpendiculars (m) R = centre of mass to point of impact (m) K = radius of gyration (m)
LBP
CE ≈ 0.6–0.8
3
Midships berthing
x=
LBP
CE ≈ 1.0
2
Caution: for ϕ < 10º, CE 1.0 Lock entrances and guiding fenders
Dolphin berths Tug
ϕ V
ϕ
α
R
R α
V a
Where the ship has a significant forward motion, PIANC suggests that the ship’s speed parallel to the berthing face (Vcosα) is not decreased by berthing impacts, and it is the transverse velocity component (Vsin α) which much be resisted by the fenders. When calculating the eccentricity coefficient, the velocity vector angle ( ϕ) is taken between V and R.
Ships rarely berth exactly midway between dolphins. ROM 0.2-90 suggests a=0.1L, with a minimum of 10m and maximum of 15m between the midpoint and the vessel’s centre of mass. This offset reduces the vector angle (ϕ) and increases the eccentricity coefficient.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–21
ECCENTRICITY COEFFICIENT (CE) Special cases for RoRo Terminals Modern RoRo terminals commonly use two different approach modes during berthing. PIANC defines these as mode b) and mode c). It is important to decide whether one or both approach modes will be used, as the berthing energies which must be absorbed by the fenders can differ considerably.
Mode b)
Mode c)
α
Breasting dolphins
≤ 15º Outer end
A A
R
V1 ≤0.25LS
Approach
R
ϕ ϕ
V1
≥ 1.05LL
≤0.25LS
α
≤ 15º
Breasting dolphins
V2
V2
B
≤0.25LS
B ≤0.25LS Inner end
V3
V3 ≤0.25LS
≤0.25LS C
End fender and shore based ramp Fender
α
C
End fender and shore based ramp
Typical values
Fender
Typical values
A
Side
100mm/s ≤ V1 ≤ 300mm/s
60° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°
A
Side
1000mm/s ≤ V1 ≤ 3000mm/s
0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 50°
B
Side
300mm/s ≤ V2 ≤ 500mm/s
N/A
B
Side
500mm/s ≤ V2 ≤ 1000mm/s
0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 50°
C
End
200mm/s ≤ V3 ≤ 500mm/s
0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 10°
C
End
200mm/s ≤ V3 ≤ 500mm/s
0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 10°
RoRo vessels with bow and/or stern ramps make a transverse approach to the berth. The ships then move along the quay or dolphins using the side fenders for guidance until they are the required distance from the shore ramp structure. Lower berthing energy Reduced speeds may affect ship manoeuvrability Increased turn-around time CE is smaller (typically 0.4–0.7)
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
RoRo vessels approach either head-on or stern-on with a large longitudinal velocity. Side fenders guide the vessel but ships berth directly against the shore ramp structure or dedicated end fenders. Quicker berthing and more controllable in strong winds High berthing energies Risk of vessel hitting inside of fenders or even the dolphins CE can be large (typically 0.6–0.9)
12–22
BERTH CONFIGURATION COEFFICIENT (CC) When ships berth at small angles against solid structures, the water between hull and quay acts as a cushion and dissipates a small part of the berthing energy. The extent to which this factor contributes will depend upon several factors:
Closed structure
Quay structure design Underkeel clearance Velocity and angle of approach Projection of fender Vessel hull shape
Semi-closed structure PIANC recommends the following values:
CC = 1.0
CC = 0.9
Open structures including berth corners Berthing angles > 5º Very low berthing velocities Large underkeel clearance Solid quay structures Berthing angles > 5º
Note: where the under keel clearance has already been considered for added mass (C M), the berth configuration coefficient CC =1 is usually assumed.
SOFTNESS COEFFICIENT (CS) Where fenders are hard relative to the �exibility of the ship hull, some of the berthing energy is absorbed by elastic deformation of the hull. In most cases this contribution is limited and ignored (C S=1). PIANC recommends the following values: CS = 1.0
Soft fenders (δf > 150mm)
CS = 0.9
Hard fenders (δf ≤ 150mm)
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–23
FENDER SELECTION Every type and size of fender has different performance characteristics. Whatever type of fenders are used, they must have sufficient capacity to absorb the normal and abnormal energies of berthing ships. When selecting fenders the designer must consider many factors including:
Single or multiple fender contacts The effects of angular compressions Approach speeds Extremes of temperature Berthing frequency Fender efficiency
n o i t c a e R
ENERGY = area under curve
De�ection
Comparing efficiency Fender efficiency is defined as the ratio of the energy absorbed to the reaction force generated. This method allows fenders of many sizes and types to be compared as the example shows. Comparisons should also be made at other compression angles, speeds and temperatures when applicable.
R
R
E
E
D
This comparison shows Super Cone and SeaGuard fenders with similar energy, reaction and hull pressure, but different height, de�ection and initial stiffness (curve gradient).
Super Cone SCN 1050 (E2) E = 458kNm R = 843kN D = 768mm P = 187kN/m�*
E = 0.543 kNm/kN R * for a 4.5m� panel
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
D SeaGuard SG 2000 × 3500 (STD) E = 454kNm R = 845kN D = 1200mm P = 172kN/m�
E = 0.537 kNm/kN R
12–24
FENDER PITCH Fenders spaced too far apart may allow ships to hit the structure. A positive clearance (C) should always be maintained, usually between 5–15% of the uncompressed fender height (H). A minimum clearance of 300mm inclusive of bow �are is commonly specified.
R , s i u d ra w o B
B
α
Smaller ships have smaller bow radius but usually cause smaller fender de�ection. Clearance distances should take account of bow �are angles. Bow �ares are greater near to the bow and stern. Where ship drawings are available, these should be used to estimate bow radius.
θ
H
δF
RB ≈
P /2
h = H – δF
h
C
P
Bow radius
θ
θ
P /2
Fender pitch
1
B
2
2
+
LOA� 8B
where, RB = bow radius (m) B = beam of vessel (m) LOA = vessel length overall (m) The bow radius formula is approximate and should be checked against actual ship dimensions where possible.
Caution Large fender spacings may work in theory but in practice a maximum spacing of 12–15m is more realistic.
As a guide to suitable distance between fenders on a continuous wharf, the formula below indicates the maximum fender pitch. Small, intermediate and large vessels should be checked.
P ≤ 2 RB2 – (RB – h + C)2 where, P = pitch of fender RB = bow radius (m) h = fender projection when compressed, measured at centreline of fender a = berthing angle C = clearance between vessel and dock (C should be 5–15% of the unde�ected fender projection, including panel) θ = hull contact angle with fender According to BS 6349: Part 4: 1994, it is also recommended that the fender spacing does not exceed 0.15 × L S, where L S is the length of the smallest ship. Cruise liner
) s 200 e r t e m150 ( s u 100 i d a r
Container ship
Bulk carrier/ general cargo
w 50 o B
0
0
65 Displacement (1000 t)
0
140 0 425 Displacement (1000 t) Displacement (1000 t)
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–25
MULTIPLE CONTACT CASES 3-fender contact
RB
δF2
RB
RB
δF1
P
2-fender contact
δF2
P
RB
δF
Berthing H line
P
P
Energy absorbed by three (or more) fenders Larger fender de�ection likely Bow �are is important 1-fender contact also possible for ships with small bow radius
P /2
P /2
Berthing line
P
Energy divided over 2 (or more) fenders Smaller fender de�ections Greater total reaction into structure Clearance depends on bow radius and bow �are
ANGULAR BERTHING The berthing angle between the fender and the ship’s hull may result in some loss of energy absorption. Angular berthing means the horizontal and/or vertical angle between the ship’s hull and the berthing structure at the point of contact. There are three possible conditions for the effects of angular berthing: �are, bow radius and dolphin.
Flare
Bow radius
Dolphin
B o w r a d i u s , R
α
B
θ β P
sin θ =
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
P 2RB
where RB = bow radius
α
12–26
FENDER PANEL DESIGN 3 design cases
Fender panels are used to distribute reaction forces into the hulls of berthing vessels. The panel design should consider many factors including:
Full-face contact
Hull pressures and tidal range Lead-in bevels and chamfers Bending moment and shear Local buckling Limit state load factors Steel grade Permissible stresses Weld sizes and types Effects of fatigue and cyclic loads Pressure test method Rubber fender connections UHMW-PE attachment Chain connections Lifting points Paint systems Corrosion allowance Maintenance and service life
Low-level impact
Double contact
n×T
F
R
F 1
R
R1
F
R2
F 2
Steel Properties PIANC steel thicknesses Standard
EN 10025
JIS G-3101
Grade
Yield Strength (min)
Tensile Strength (min)
Temperature
N/mm²
psi
N/mm²
psi
°C
°F
S235JR (1.0038)
235
34 000
360
52 000
–
–
S275JR (1.0044)
275
40 000
420
61 000
–
–
S355J2 (1.0570)
355
51 000
510
74 000
-20
-4
S355J0 (1.0553)
355
51 000
510
74 000
0
32
SS41
235
34 000
402
58 000
0
32
SS50
275
40 000
402
58 000
0
32
SM50
314
46 000
490
71 000
0
32
A-36
250
36 000
400
58 000
0
32
A-572
345
50 000
450
65 000
0
32
PIANC recommends the following minimum steel thicknesses for fender panel construction: Exposed both faces
≥ 12mm
Exposed one face
≥ 9mm
Internal (not exposed)
≥ 8mm
Source: PIANC 2002; Section 4.1.6. Corresponding minimum panel thickness will be 140–160mm (excluding UHMW-PE face pads) and often much g reater.
Typical panel weights ASTM
The national standards of France and G ermany have been replaced by EN 10025. In the UK, BS4360 has been replaced by BS EN 10025. T he table above is for guidance only
The table can be used as a guide to minimum average panel weight (excluding UHMW-PE face pads) for different service conditions:
and is not comprehensive. Actual specifications should be consulted in all cases for the full specifications of steel grades listed and other similar grades.
Light duty
200–250kg/m�
Medium duty
250–300kg/m�
Heavy duty
300–400kg/m�
Extreme duty
≥400kg/m�
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–27
HULL PRESSURES W
Allowable hull pressures depend on hull plate thickness and frame spacing. These vary according to the type of ship. PIANC gives the following advice on hull pressures: Size/class
Hull pressure (kN/m�)
< 1 000 teu (1st/2nd generation) < 3 000 teu (3rd generation) < 8 000 teu (4th generation) > 8 000 teu (5th/6th generation)
< 400 < 300 < 250 < 200
General cargo
≤ 20 000 DWT > 20 000 DWT
400–700 < 400
Oil tankers
≤ 20 000 DWT ≤ 60 000 DWT
< 250 < 300
VLCC/ULCC
> 60 000 DWT
150–200
Gas carriers
LNG/LPG
< 200
Vessel type
H
P=
R Container ships
W×H
P = average hull pressure (kN/m�) R = total fender reaction (kN) W = panel width, excluding bevels (m) H = panel height, excluding bevels (m)
Bulk carriers
< 200
RoRo Passenger/cruise SWATH
Usually fitted with beltings (strakes)
Source: PIANC 2002; Table 4.4.1
BELTINGS
Belting types
Most ships have beltings (sometimes called belts or strakes). These come in many shapes and sizes – some are well-designed, others can be poorly maintained or modified. Care is needed when designing fender panels to cope with beltings and prevent snagging or catching which may damage the system. Belting line loads exert crushing forces on the fender panel which must be considered in the structural design. Application
Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
Vessels
Belting Load (kN/m)
Aluminium hulls
150–300
Container RoRo/Cruise
Belting range
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
1
2
h
3
500–1 000 1 000–1 500
Belting range is often greater than tidal range due to ship design, heave, roll, and changes in draft.
≥h
1
2
Common on RoRo/Cruise ships. Projection 200–40 0mm (typical).
3
Common on LNG/Oil tankers, barges, offshore supply vessels and some container ships. Projection 100–250mm (typical).
12–28
FRICTION Typical friction design values
Friction has a large in�uence on the fender design, particularly for restraint chains. Low friction facing materials (UHMW-PE) are often used to reduce friction. Other materials, like polyurethanes (PU) used for the skin of foam fenders, have lower friction coefficients than rubber against steel or concrete. The table can be used as a guide to typical design values. Friction coefficients may vary due to wet or dry conditions, local temperatures, static and dynamic load cases, as well as surface roughness.
Materials
Friction Coefficient (μ)
UHMW-PE
Steel
0.2
HD-PE
Steel
0.3
Polyurethane
Steel
0.4
Rubber
Steel
0.7
Timber
Steel
0.4
Steel
Steel
0.5
CHAIN DESIGN Chains can be used to restrain the movements of fenders during compression or to support static loads. Chains may serve four main functions:
Weight chains support the steel panel and prevent excessive drooping of the system. They may also resist vertical shear forces caused by ship movements or changing draft. Shear chains resist horizontal forces caused during longitudinal approaches or warping operations. Tension chains restrict tension on the fender rubber. Correct location can optimise the de�ection geometry. Keep chains are used to moor �oating fenders or to prevent loss of fixed fenders in the event of accidents.
1
3
Factors to be considered when designing fender chains:
Corrosion reduces link diameter and weakens the chain. Corrosion allowances and periodic replacement should be allowed for. A ‘weak link’ in the chain system is desirable to prevent damage to more costly components in an accident.
SWL =
2
μR + W n cosθ
MBL ≥ F C × SWL θ
where, SWL = safe working load (kN) FC = safety factor μ = coefficient of friction R = fender reaction (kN) W = gross panel weight (kg) (for shear chains, W = 0) n = number of chains θ = effective chain angle (degrees)
μR
1
Tension chains
2
Weight chains
3
Shear chains
W
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–29
UHMW-PE FACING The contact face of a fender panel helps to determine the lifetime maintenance costs of a fender installation. UHMW-PE (FQ1000) is the best material available for such applications. It uniquely combines low friction, impact strength, non-marking characteristics and resistance to wear, temperature extremes, seawater and marine borers. Sinter moulded into plates at extremely high pressure, UHMW-PE is a totally homogeneous material which is available in many sizes and thicknesses. These plates can be cut, machined and drilled to suit any type of panel or shield.
Fastening example
W t
Always use oversize washers to spread the load.
Application
Light duty Medium duty
Heavy duty
Extreme duty
t (mm)
W* (mm)
Bolt
30
3–5
M16
40
7–10
50
10–15
60
15–19
70
18–25
80
22–32
90
25–36
100
28–40
M16–M20
M24–M30
M30–M36
* Where allowances are typical values, actual wear allowance may vary due fixing detail.
The standard colour is black, but UHMW-PE is available in many other colours if
Large pads vs small pads Larger pads are usually more robust but smaller pads are easier and cheaper to replace.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–30
CORROSION PREVENTION Fenders are usually installed in corrosive environments, sometimes made worse by high temperature and humidity. Corrosion of fender accessories can be reduced with specialist paint coatings, by galvanising or with selective use of stainless steels. Paint coatings and galvanising have a finite life. Coating must be reapplied at intervals during the life of the fender. Galvanised components like chains or bolts may need periodic re-galvanising or replacement. Stainless steels should be carefully selected for their performance in seawater.
Paint coatings ISO EN 12944 is a widely used international standard defining the durability of corrosion protection systems in various environments. The C5-M class applies to marine coastal, offshore and high salinity locations and is considered to be the most applicable to fenders. The life expectancy or ‘durability’ of coatings is divided into three categories which estimate the time to first major maintenance: Low
2–5 years
Medium
5–15 years
High
>15 years
Durability range is not a guarantee. It is to help operators estimate sensible maintenance times.
The table gives some typical C5-M class paint systems which provide high durability in marine environments. Note that coal tar epoxy paints are not available in some countries. Priming Coat(s)
Top Coats
Paint System
Paint System
Surface Preparation
Binder
Primer
No. coats
NDFT
Binder
No. coats
NDFT
No. coats
NDFT
Expected durability (C5-M corrosivity)
S7.09
Sa 2.5
EP, PUR
Zn (R)
1
40
EP, PUR
3-4
280
4-5
320
High (>15y)
S7.11
Sa 2.5
EP, PUR
Zn (R)
1
40
CTE
3
360
4
400
High (>15y)
S7.16
Sa 2.5
CTE
Misc
1
100
CTE
2
200
3
300
Medium (5-15y)
Sa 2.5 is defined in ISO 85 01-1
Misc = miscellaneous types of
PUR = 1-pack or 2-pack polyurethane
NDFT = Nominal dry film thickness
anticorrosive pigments
CTE = 2-pack coal tar epoxy
Zn (R) = Zinc rich primer
EP = 2-pack epoxy
Design considerations Other paint systems may also satisfy the C5-M requirements but in choosing any coating the designer should carefully consider the following:
Corrosion protection systems are not a substitute for poor design details such as re-entrant shapes and corrosion traps. Minimum dry film thickness >80% of NDFT (typical) Maximum film thickness <3 × NDFT (typical) Local legislation on emission of solvents or health & safety factors Application temperatures, drying and handling times Maximum over-coating times Local conditions including humidity or contaminants
Refer to paint manufacturer for advice on specific applications and products.
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–31
CORROSION PREVENTION Galvanising Hot-dip galvanising is the process of coating steel parts with a zinc layer by passing the component through a bath of molten zinc. When exposed to sea water the zinc acts as an anodic reservoir which protects the steel underneath. Once the zinc is depleted the steel will begin to corrode and lose strength. Galvanising thickness can be increased by:
shot blasting the components before dipping pickling the components in acid double dipping the components (only suitable for some steel grades)
Spin galvanising is used for threaded components which are immersed in molten zinc then immediately centrifuged to remove any excess zinc and clear the threads. Spin galvanised coatings are thinner than hot dip galvanised coatings and will not last as long in marine environments. Typical galvanising thicknesses: Hot dip galvanising
85μm
Spin galvanising
40μm
Stainless steels Pitting Resistance
Galling
Stainless steel performance in seawater varies according to pitting resistance. Chemical composition – especially Chromium (Cr), Molybdenum (Mo) and Nitrogen (N) content – is a major factor in pitting resistance. The pitting resistance equivalent number (PREN) is a theoretical way to compare stainless steel grades. The most common formula for PREN is:
Galling or ‘cold welding’ affects threaded stainless steel components including nuts, bolts and anchors. The protective oxide layer of the stainless steel gets scraped off during tightening causing high local friction and welding of the threads. After galling, seized fasteners cannot be further tightened or removed and usually needs to be cut out and replaced. To avoid this problem, always apply anti-galling compounds to threads before assembly. If these are unavailable then molybdenum disulfide or PTFE based lubricants can be used.
PREN = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N Cr and Mo are major cost factors for stainless steel. A high PREN material will usually last longer but cost more. Grade
Common Name
1.4501 Zeron 100 1.4462 SAF 2205
Type
Cr (%)
Mo (%)
N (%)
PREN
Duplex
24.0–26.0
3.0– 4.0
0.2–0.3
37.1–44.0
Comments
used where very long ser vice life is needed 30.9–38.1 or access for inspection is difficult
Duplex
21.0–23.0
2.5–3.5
0.1–0.22
1.4401
316S31
Austenitic
16.5–18.5
2.0–2.5
0–0.11
23.1–28.5
1.4301
304
Austenitic
17.0–19.5
–
0–0.11
17.0–21.3
1.4003
3CR12
Ferritic
10.5–12.5
–
0–0.03
10.5–13.0
widely used for fender fixings unsuitable for most fender applications
Percentages of Cr, Mo and N are t ypical mid-range values and may dif fer within permissible limits for each grade. Source: British Stainless Steel Association ( www.bssa.org.uk).
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–32
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PROJECT DETAILS
PROJECT STATUS
Port
TMS Ref:
Project
Preliminary
Designer
Detail design
Contractor
Tender
F D LBP LOA
B
LARGEST VESSEL
SMALLEST VESSEL
Vessel type
Vessel type
Deadweight
(t)
Deadweight
(t)
Displacement
(t)
Displacement
(t)
Length overall (LOA)
(m)
Length overall (L OA)
(m)
Length between perps (LBP)
(m)
Length between perps (LBP)
(m)
Beam (B)
(m)
Beam (B)
(m)
Draft (D)
(m)
Draft (D)
(m)
Freeboard (F)
(m)
Freeboard (F)
(m)
Hull pressure (P)
(t/m�)
Hull pressure (P)
(t/m�)
BERTH DETAILS
Closed structure
Semi-open structure
Structure
Open structure
Other (please describe)
Tide levels
Length of berth
(m)
Tidal range
(m)
Fender/dolphin spacing
(m)
Highest astronomic tide (HAT)
(m)
Mean high water spring (MHWS)
(m)
Permitted fender reaction
(kN/m)
Quay level
(m)
Mean sea level (MSL)
(m)
Cope thickness
(m)
Mean low water spring (MLWS)
(m)
Seabed level
(m)
Lowest astronomic tide (LAT)
(m)
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–33
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS BERTHING MODE
BERTHING APPROACH Approach conditions
Side berthing
a) easy berthing, sheltered b) difficult berthing, sheltered c) easy berthing, exposed
Dolphin berthing incl. RoRo mode b)
d) good berthing, exposed e) difficult berthing, exposed Largest ship
End berthing Berthing speed
(m/s)
Berthing angle
(deg)
Lock or dock entrance Abnormal impact factor Smallest ship
Ship-to-ship berthing Berthing speed
(m/s)
Berthing angle
(deg)
RoRo mode c) Abnormal impact factor
ENVIRONMENT
QUALITY
Operating temperature
SAFETY
Highest quality
Maximum safety
Lowest price
Not safety-critical
Minimum ___________________________________ (°C) Maximum __________________________________ (°C) Corrosivity
low
medium
high
extreme
FURTHER DETAILS AVAILABLE FROM
Name
Tel
Company
Fax
Position
Mobile
Address
Email Web
M1100-S12-V1.1-EN © Trelleborg AB, 2007
12–34
RUBBER PROPERTIES All Trelleborg rubber fenders are made using the highest quality Natural Rubber (NR) or Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) based compounds which meet or exceed the performance requirements of international fender recommendations, such as PIANC and EAU. Trelleborg can also make fenders from other NR/SBR compounds or from materials such as Neoprene, Butyl Rubber, EPDM and Polyurethane. Different manufacturing processes such as moulding, wrapping and extrusion require certain characteristics from the rubber. The tables below give usual physical properties for fenders made by these processes which are confirmed during quality assurance testing.* All test results are from laboratory made and cured test pieces. Results from samples taken from actual fenders will differ due to the sample preparation process – please ask for details.
Moulded and wrapped fenders Property
Testing Standard
Condition
Requirement
Tensile Streng th
DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251
Original Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC
12.8 MPa (min)
Elongation at Break
DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251
Original
350%
Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC
280%
Hardness
DIN 53505; ASTM D 2240; AS1683.15.2; JIS K 6253
Original
78° Shore A (max)
Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC
Original +8° Shore A (max)
Compression Set
ASTM D 395 Method B; AS 1683.13 Method B; BS903 A6; ISO 815; JIS K 6262
22 hours at 70°C
30% (max)
Tear Resistance
ASTM D 624 Die B; AS 1683.12; BS ISO 34-1; JIS K 6252
Original
70kN/m (min)
Ozone Resistance
DIN 53509; ASTM D 1149; AS 1683-24; BS ISO 1431-1; JIS K 6259
50pphm at 20% strain, 40°C, 100 hours
No cracks
Seawater Resistance
BS ISO 1817; ASTM D 471
28 days at 95°C
Hardness: ±10° Shore A (max) Volume: +10/-5% (max)
ASTM D5963-04; BS ISO 4649 : 2002
Original
100mm� (max)
BS903 A9, Method B
3000 revolutions
1.5cc (max)
Bond S treng th
ASTM D 429, Method B; B S 9 03. A21 S ection 21.1
Rubber to steel
Dynamic Fatigue †
ASTM D430-95, Method B
15,000 cycles
7N/mm (min) Grade 0–1‡
Abrasion
16.0 MPa (min)
Extruded fenders Property
Testing Standard
Condition
Requirement
DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251
Original
13.0 MPa (min)
Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC
10.4 MPa (min)
Elongation at Break
DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251
Original
280% (min)
Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC
224% (min)
Hardness
DIN 53505; ASTM D 2240; AS1683.15.2; JIS K 6253
Original
78° Shore A (max)
Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC
Original +8° Shore A (max)
Compression Set
ASTM D 395 Method B; AS 1683.13 Method B; BS903 A6; ISO 815; JIS K 6262
22 hours at 70°C
30% (max)
Tear Resistance
ASTM D 624 Die B; AS1683.12; BS ISO 34-1; JIS K 6252
Original
60kN/m (min)
Ozone Resistance
DIN 53509; ASTM D 1149; AS 1683-24; BS ISO 1431-1; JIS K 6259
50pphm at 20% strain, 40°C, 100 hours
No cracks
Seawater Resistance
BS ISO 1817; ASTM D 471
28 days at 95°C
Hardness: ±10° Shore A (max) Volume: +10/-5% (max)
Abrasion
ASTM D5963-04; BS ISO 4649 : 2002
Original
180mm� (max)
Tensile Streng th
* Material property cer tificates are issued for each different rubber grade on all orders for SCN Super Cone, SCK Cell Fender, Unit Element, AN/ANP Arch, Cy lindrical Fender, MV and MI Elements. Unless other wise requested at time of order, material certificates issued for other fender types are based on results of standard bulk and/or batch tests which form part of routine factory ISO9001 quality procedures and are for a limited range of physical properties (tensile streng th, elongation at break and hardness). † Dynamic ‡ Grade
fatigue testing is optional at extra cost.
0 = no cracks (pass). Grade 1 = 10 or fewer pinpricks <0.5mm long (pass). Grades 2–10 = increasing crack size (fail).
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–35
TOLERANCES Trelleborg fenders are subject to standard manufacturing and performance tolerances. For specific applications, smaller tolerances may be agreed on a case-by-case basis. Fender type
Dimension
Tolerance
All dimensions
±3% or ±2mm*
Bolt hole spacing
±4mm (non- cumulative)
Cross-section
±3% or ±2mm*
Length
±2% or ±25mm*
Drilled hole centres
±4mm (non- cumulative)
Counterbore depth
±2mm (under-head depth)
Block fenders
Cross-section
±2% or ±2mm*
Cube fenders
Length
±2% or ±10mm*
M fenders
Fixing hole centres
±3mm
W fenders
Fixing hole diameter
±3mm
Outside diameter
±4%
Inside diameter
±4%
Length
±30mm
Cross-section
±4% or ISO 3302-E3*
Length
±30mm
Drilled hole centres
±4mm (non- cumulative)
Counterbore depth
±3mm (under-head depth)
Cross-section
±4%
Length
±2% or ±10mm*
Drilled hole centres
±2mm (non- cumulative)
Counterbore depth
±2mm (under-head depth)
Length and width
±5mm (cut pads)
Length and width
±20mm (uncut sheets)
Thickness:
≤30mm
±0.2mm
(planed) 31–100mm
±0.3mm
≥101mm
±0.5mm
Moulded fenders
Composite fenders
Cylindrical fenders
Extruded fenders
HD-PE sliding fenders †
UHMW-PE face pads†
Thickness:
≤30mm
±2.5mm
(unplaned) 31–100mm
±4.0mm
±6.0mm
≥101mm
Drilled hole centres
±2mm (non- cumulative)
Counterbore depth
±2mm (under-head depth)
* Whichever is the greater dimension † HD- PE
and UHMW-PE dimensions are measured at 18°C and are subject to thermal expansion coefficients (see material properties)
Performance tolerances ‡ Fender type
Parameter
Tolerance
SCN, SCK, UE, AN, ANP, MV and MI fenders
Reaction, energy
±10%
Cylindricals (wrapped)
Reaction, energy
±10%
Cylindricals (extruded)
Reaction, energy
±20%
Extruded fenders
Reaction, energy
±20%
Pneumatic fenders
Reaction and energy
±10%
Block, cube, M, W, tug and workboat fenders
Reaction
±10%
SeaGuard, SeaCushion and Donut fenders
Reaction and energy
±15%
‡ Performance
tolerances apply to Rated Performance Dat a (RPD). They do not apply to energ y and/or reaction at intermediate
de�ections. The nominal rated de�ection when RPD is achieved may vary and is provided for guidance only. Please consult Trelleborg Marine Systems for performance tolerance on fender types not listed above.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–36
TESTING PROCEDURES Trelleborg testing procedures for ‘solid-type’ rubber fenders comply with PIANC ‘Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems: 2002: Appendix A: Section 6: Verification/Quality Assurance Testing’. The Constant Velocity (CV) test method is used for SCN, SCK, UE, AN/ANP and Cylindrical Fenders. MV and MI fenders are tested using the Decreasing Velocity (DV) method on the dedicated Trelleborg high speed test press. All other fender types are tested on special request.
Compression Test Method All fenders will be given a unique manufacturing serial number for traceability. Sampling is 1 in 10 fenders (rounded up to a unit) unless otherwise agreed.1 No additional break-in cycles are carried out unless otherwise agreed.1 Performance will be measured at 0° compression angle. Readings shall be taken at intervals of between 0.01H to 0.05H (where H = nominal fender height). Fender temperature will be stabilised to 23°C ± 5°C for at least 24 hours before compression testing. Minimum temperature stabilisation time will be calculated as tmin = 20x1.5 (where ‘x’ is the thickness of the fender body in metres). Stabilising time (t min) can include the time taken for ‘break-in’ and ‘recovery’. ‘Break in’ the fender by de�ecting it three times to rated de�ection. Remove load from the fender and allow ‘recovery’ for at least 1 hour. Stop testing when de�ection reaches rated de�ection or RPD2 is achieved. CV only:
De�ect the fender once at a constant de�ection speed of 0.0003–0.0013m/s (2–8cm/min) and record reaction and de�ection.
DV only:
De�ect the fender once at a linearly-decreasing or sinusoidally decreasing variable velocity with initial velocity of 0.15m/s (or other speed as agreed) and final velocity ≤0.005m/s.
Test Apparatus & Reporting The test apparatus shall be equipped with a calibrated 3 load cell system and linear transducer(s) for measuring displacement. These will provide continuous real-time monitoring of fender performance. Test reports shall include the following as a minimum: Serial Number and description of test fender. Date of test, name of test supervisor and signature of Quality Manager. Table and graph of reaction (RVT) versus de�ection and energy (EVT) versus de�ection. Pass Criteria4 Fenders have passed verification testing if they meet the following conditions: RVT ≤ RRPD × 1.1 × VF × TF EVT ≥ ERPD × 0.9 × VF × TF Where, RVT = reaction from verification testing RRPD = Rated Performance Data (or customer’s required reaction) EVT = energy from verification testing ERPD = Rated Performance Data (or customer’s required energy) TF = Temperature factor when test sample is above or below 23ºC ± 5ºC CV only:
VF
DV only:
VF Where testing of cylindrical, Arch, element and similar fenders over 2.0m long is required, please contact your local office to discuss exact requirements.
= velocity factor for actual test speed/time (or 1.0 unless otherwise stated) = velocity factor for test speeds other than 0.15m/s (or 1.0 unless otherwise stated)
Notes
1 Standard PIANC Verification Testing of 10% of fender order (rounded up to the nearest unit) is included within the price for the fender types listed. Additional tests, third-party witnessing and special procedures will incur extra charges. For load-sensitive structures, a single break-in de�ection for all fenders with reaction of 100t or more is included in the fender price if notified at the time of order. 2 Rated Performance Data (RPD) is defined in the relevant product sections of this catalogue. 3 All measuring equipment shall be calibrated and certified accurate to within ±1% in accordance with ISO or equivalent JIS or ASTM requirements. Calibration shall be traceable to national/international standard and shall be performed annually by an accredited third party organization. 4 Pass criteria as defined by PIANC ‘Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems: 2002: Appendix A’. De�ection is not considered to be a pass/fail criterion by PIANC. Non-compliant units will be clearly marked and segregated.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–37
PERFORMANCE TESTING Trelleborg is committed to providing high quality products. Consistency and performance are routinely checked in accordance with the latest procedures and test protocols. PIANC has introduced new methods and procedures for testing the performance of solid rubber fenders, allowing for real world operating conditions, in their document ‘Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems: 2002: Appendix A’. Many of Trelleborg’s most popular fender types are PIANC Type Approved. This brings the following benefits:
proven product quality tests simulate real operating conditions longer service life lower maintenance greater reliability reduced lifetime costs manufacturer commitment excludes unsafe ‘copy’ and ‘fake’ fenders simplifies contract specifications
Verification testing of SCK 3000
Testing is carried out in two stages: to prove behaviour of the generic fender type, and then to confirm that performance of fenders made for each project meet the required performances.
Type Approval testing (Stage 1) PIANC Type Approval testing is carried out to determine the effects of environmental factors on the performance of various fender types. Trelleborg’s Type Approval tests are witnessed by Germanischer Lloyd. Super Cone, Unit Element, SCK Cell and Arch Fenders have been Type Approved to PIANC standards.
Verification testing (Stage 2) Verification testing using either CV method (all fender types except MV and MI elements) or DV method (MV and MI elements only) is carried out on all significant orders to confirm the Rated Performance Data (RPD) of the fender. Results are normalised to 0.15m/s compression speed, 23°C temperature and 0° compression angle.
CV testing of SCN Super Cones
DV testing of MV elements
Note: Testing programmes for
foam, pneumatic, extruded, composite, shear, and other fender types are agreed with customers on request and on a case-by-case basis.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–38
RATED PERFORMANCE DATA (RPD)
RRP
RPD is normalised to: 0.15m/s initial impact speed 23°C temperature 0° compression angle.
n i o t c a R e ERP
g y E n e r
De�ection
d
Correction factors from type approved tests VF
Impact speed
0.001m/s to 0.3m/s
Rubber is a visco-elastic material, meaning that reaction and energy are affected by the speed of compression. Some rubbers are more affected by the compression speed than others. RPD is normalised to 0.15m/s.
1.0 Vi
0.15m/s (VRP)
Temperature
–30°C to +50°C
At low temperatures rubber becomes stiffer, which increases reaction forces. At higher temperatures rubber softens, which reduces energy absorption. RPD is normalised to 23°C.
TF
1.0
23°C (TRP)
Compression angle
0° to 20°
Most fenders lose some energy absorption capacity when compressed at an angle. RPD is normalised to 0°.
AF 1.0
0°C (αRP)
Durability
T
α
3000 cycles minimum
To prove durability, fenders should be subjected to a long-term fatigue test of at least 3000 cycles to rated de�ection without failure.
1.0
n
To be meaningful, Type Approval testing should be monitored and witnessed by accredited third-party inspectors such as Germanischer Lloyd. After successful Type Approval testing, the manufacturer should publish Rated Performance Data (RPD) for their fenders along with correction factor tables for different velocities, temperatures and compression angles.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–39
PASS CRITERIA Verification testing (or quality control testing) is carried out to prove the performance of fenders for each project in accordance with catalogue RPD or other customer-specified values. Samples from the project (usually 10% of the total quantity in each size and grade) are tested and the results obtained are adjusted if necessary using the correction factor tables for initial impact speed and temperature.
Reaction force pass criteria
RRP x 1.1
FAIL PASS
n o i t c a e R
RVT ≤ RRP × VF × TF × 1.1 Assuming a +10% manufacturing tolerance on reaction. De�ection
d
Energy absorption pass criteria
ERP x 0.9
PASS FAIL
y g r e n E
EVT ≥ ERP × VF × TF × 0.9 Assuming a –10% manufacturing tolerance on energy. De�ection
d
where, RVT = reaction from verification testing RRP = customer’s required reaction EVT = energy from verification testing ERP = customer’s required energy VF = velocity factor for actual test speed TF = temperature factor for actual test temperature
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–40
TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–41
TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–42
QUALITY DOCUMENTS Customers should expect to receive appropriate documents to prove the quality of the fenders and accessories ordered. A comprehensive document package might include:
Quality and environmental Factory ISO 9001: 2000 quality management system Factory ISO 14001: 2004 environmental management system
Fixing accessories Mill certificates Visual inspection report Certificate of conformity
Literature and data sheets Printed brochures or lea�ets for the supplied products PIANC correction tables (where applicable) PIANC Type Approval cer tificates (where applicable)
Chains Proof load test Mill certificates (optional but recommended) Galvanising certificate Dimensional inspection report (where applicable) Certificate of conformity
Performance tests Verification test results and cur ves for each fender tested Third party witness certificate (optional but recommended) Certificate of conformity Physical properties Laboratory report for hardness, tensile strength and elongation at break, before and after ageing Durability test report (optional but recommended) Wear, tear and ozone resistance test reports Third party witness certificate (optional but recommended) Certificate of conformity
Low friction pads Dimensional inspection report Certificate of conformity Other As built drawings Installation, operation and maintenance manual Inspection logbook Warranty certificate General certificate of conformity After-sales contact details
Steel fabrications Mill certificates Welder qualification certificates Weld procedures Dimensional check report (including �atness for panels) NDT inspection report – minimum 5% MPI (optional but recommended) Pressure (leak) test inspection report Paint application report (temperature, humidity, dew point, etc) Dry film thickness test report Certificate of conformity
The accuracy and authenticity of quality documents is very important. Trelleborg will provide an original or certified copy of any third party report on request.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–43
CONVERSION TABLES Length
Area
m
ft
in
m
1
3.281
39.37
ft
0.3048
1
12
in
0.0245
0.0833
1
m�
ft�
in�
m�
1
10.764
1550
ft�
0.0929
1
in�
Volume
Mass
m�
Energy
Pressure
Density
Acceleration
Angle
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
m�
ft�
in�
1
35.315
61024
0.0283
1
1728
16.387 × 10 -6
578.7 × 10 -6
1
tonne
kip
tonne
1
2.2046
0.4536
1
kN
tonne-f
kip-f
1
0.102
0.225
tonne-f
9.81
1
2.2046
kip-f
4.45
0.454
1
kN
kNm
tf-m
kip-ft
kNm
1
0.102
0.7376
tf-m
9.81
1
0.205
kip-ft
1.36
4.88
1
kN/m�
t/m�
kip/ft�
1
0.102
0.0209
kN/m� t/m�
9.81
1
0.205
kip/ft�
47.9
4.88
1
tonne/m�
kip/ft�
tonne/m�
1
0.0624
16.018
1
N/mm�
psi
1kJ = 1kNm
1ksf = 1kip/ft�
1
145.04
6.895 × 10 -3
1
1MPa = 1N/mm�
m/s
ft/s
km/h
mph
knot
m/s
1
3.2808
3.600
2.2369
1.9438
ft/s
0.3048
1
1.0973
0.6818
0.5925
km/h
0.2778
0.9113
1
0.6214
0.5400
mph
0.4470
1.4667
1.6093
1
0.8690
knot
0.5144
1.6878
1.8520
1.1508
1
N/mm� psi
Velocity
1
ft�
kip/ft�
Stress
6.944 × 10
144 -3
in�
kip
Force
645.2 × 10
-6
Visit www.trelleborg.com/marine to download a free units conversion programme, ‘Convert’. Registered visitors can find Convert on the Technical menu after registering or logging in to the site.
g
g
m/s�
ft/s�
1
9.807
32.17
m/s�
0.102
1
3.281
ft/s�
6.895 × 10 -3
0.3048
1
degree
radian
degree
1
17.45 × 10 -3
radian
57.3
1
12–44
CALCULATIONS TRELLEBORG MARINE SYSTEMS Project
Prepared
Title
Date
Client
Ref
Sheet Nº
www.trelleborg.com/marine
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–45
CALCULATIONS TRELLEBORG MARINE SYSTEMS Project
Prepared
Title
Date
Client
Ref
www.trelleborg.com/marine
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
Sheet Nº
12–46
Disclaimer Trelleborg AB has made every effort to ensure that the technical specifications and product descriptions in this catalogue are correct. The responsibility or liability for errors and omissions cannot be accepted for any reason whatsoever. Customers are advised to request a detailed specification and certified drawing prior to construction and manufacture. In the interests of improving the quality and performance of our products and systems, we reserve the right to make specification changes without prior notice. All dimensions, material properties and performance values quoted are subject to normal production and testing tolerances. This catalogue supersedes the information provided in all previous editions. If in doubt, please check with Trelleborg Marine Systems. © Trelleborg AB, PO Box 153, 231 22 Trelleborg, Sweden. This catalogue is the copyright of Trelleborg AB and may not be reproduced, copied or distributed to third parties without the prior consent of Trelleborg AB in each case. Fentek, Rubbylene and Orkot are Registered Trade Marks of Trelleborg AB.
Designed by Harrison Sigala (www.harrisonsigala.com)
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
12–47
Four business areas Trelleborg is a global industrial group whose leading positions are based on advanced polymer technology and in- depth applications know-how. We develop high-performance solutions that
Trelleborg Engineered Systems
is a leading global supplier of engineered solutions that focus on the sealing, protection and safety of investments, processes and individuals in extremely demanding environments.
seal, damp and protect in demanding industrial environments. The Group has annual sales of approximately €3 billion, with about 24,000 employees in 40 countries. The head office is located in Trelleborg, Sweden. Trelleborg AB was founded in 1905. With 100 years behind us, our history, like our future, is characterised by a constant drive for quality and
Trelleborg Automotive is a world-
leader in the development and production of polymer-based components and systems used for noise and vibration damping for passenger car and light and heavy trucks.
a passion for identifying new solution to complex problems.
Trelleborg Sealing Solutions is a
leading global supplier of precision seals for the industrial, aerospace and automotive markets.
In 2005, the Trelleborg Group celebrated its centenary. To us, quality is a state of mind. We adopt an in-depth approach to each problem, aiming for long-term solutions. Yesterday’s and today’s innovations, know-how and quality form the foundation of tomorrow.
© Trelleborg AB, 2007 M1100-S12-V1.1-EN
Trelleborg Wheel Systems is a
leading global supplier of tires and complete wheel systems for farm and forest machinery, forklift trucks and other materials-handling vehicles.